Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 201

SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZAR5731/S1E

DIGITAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
MODEL

AR-5726/5731

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING


[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used


for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[5] ADJUSTMENTS

1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

2. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i


[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Line of machines and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

[6] SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
2. Simulation code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
2. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
[8] MAINTENANCE

3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1

4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

2. Details of Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3

5. Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3

3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE


1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
5. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
6. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
7. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
8. Drive motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
9. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
10. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
11. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
12. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8

[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE


1. Firmware update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9

NOTE FOR SERVICING


This Service Manual uses some photographs to assure safe operation.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious danger
to life or a serious injury may result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, injury or damage
to property could result.

2. Precautions for servicing


1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
care when servicing.

1. Warning for servicing


1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
3) Be sure the machine is properly grounded. Failure to ground the
machine properly may result in an electric shock or fire.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the ground wire, never connect it to the following
points as it may cause an explosion, fire, or an electric shock:
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord. Do not put heavy
objects on the power cord. Do not bend or pull the cord forcefully. It
may cause a fire or electric shock.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which may
drop inside the machine.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
8) Do not touch the power plug, insert a telephone jack, perform service or operate the machine with wet or oil hands. It may cause an
electric shock.

3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may


cause an electric shock . Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5) When servicing the machine while operating, be careful not to
make contact with chains, belts, gear, and any other moving parts.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with water
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery on the PWB, use only the specified battery. If a battery of different specification is used, it may not
be compatible and cause breakdown or malfunction of the
machine.
11) When carrying an electric unit or a PWB, use an anti-static (electricity) bag. Failure to do so may cause component failure or
machine malfunction.

3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU


When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the
power plug from the power outlet.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation
check.
4) Do not modify the LSU.
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is performed, safety may not be assured.

AR-5726/5731 NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE


1. Line of machines and options
Document cover
[MX-VR10]

Reversing single pass feeder


[MX-RP10]

Job separator tray


[MX-TR11]

Staple cartridge
[MX-SCX1]
Finisher
[MX-FN13]
Installation of the
MX-FN13 is required.

Copier/Printer (SPLC) model


[AR-5726/5731]

Exit tray unit


[MX-TE10]

Machine stand
(Large)
[MX-DS11]

Machine stand
(Small)
[MX-DS12]

Paper feed unit


(500 Sheets)
[MX-DE10]

FAX expantion kit

Expantion memory board

FAX memory (8MB)

[AR-FX7]

[AR-SM5](256MB)
[AR-SM6](512MB)

[AR-MM9]

AR-5726/5731 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1

Paper feed unit


(500x2 Sheets)
[MX-DE11]

[2] SPECIFICATIONS

(8) Engine speed (ppm)

1. Basic function

31-sheet
model

A3

15

17

B4/8.5 x 13

17

20

A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K

26

31

A4R/8.5 x 11R/16KR

18

24

B5R

21

11 x 17

14

17

8.5 x 14

16

20

14

17

Paper size

Tray 1-4

A. Base engine
(1) Type
Type

26-sheet
model

Tray

Desktop

(2) Engine composition


Photoconductor kind

OPC drum (Drum dia. 30mm)

Copying method

Electronic photo (Laser)

Developing system

Dry, 2-component magnetic brush


development

Charging system

Sawtooth charging

Transfer system

Transfer roller system

Cleaning system

Contact blade system

Fusing system

Heat roller

Toner supply method

Toner supply by front cover open

Waste toner disposal

Toner cartridge collection

8K
Manual paper
feed

19

A3
8.5 x 13

17

20

B4

16

19

A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/
5.5 x 8.5/16K

23

27

A4R/8.5 x 11R

19

22

16KR

(3) Dimensions / Weight


External dimensions
(W x D x H)

OC model: 623 x 628 x 668mm


RSPF model: 623 x 628 x 788mm

Occupied
dimensions (W x D)
(when the manual
paper feed tray is
extended)

898 x 628mm

Weight

About 46kg

23

B5R

21

11 x 17

14

24
16

8.5 x 14

16

19

(9) Power source

(4) Warmup

Voltage/Current

220 - 240V 8A

Frequency

50/60Hz

Power source code

Inlet type

Power switch

1 power source

(10) Power consumption

Warm-up time

23 sec or less (26-sheet model)


25 sec or less (31-sheet model)

Pre-heat

Yes

Jam recovery time

About 10sec, excluding fusing warmup, toner


control, etc.

Conditions: Leaving for 60 sec after door open, standard conditions,


polygon stop.

Maximum rated
power consumption

1.45kw

Shift time to sleep


mode

Default (1 minute)

(11) Memory
Local Memory

(5) First copy time


Platen

26-sheet model

31-sheet model

4.8 sec

4.5 sec

RSPF

9.3 sec or less

Standard

32MB

Expansion

512MB x 2

Max.

1056MB

B. Controller board
(1) Controller board
SPLC board

Measuring conditions: When paper of A4 or 8.5 x 11 is fed from the

machine tray, with the polygon rotating.

Interface

Ethernet

No

USB 2.0 Device

(6) Engine resolution

Full Speed 1slot

600 x 600dpi

Memory

No

Smoothing (Print)

1200dpi (equivalent) x 600dpi

Memory expansion slot

---

Gradation

Writing: Binary

Writing resolution

C. Operation panel

(7) Printable range


Max. print size

Void area image loss

Type
AB series: 416 x 293mm
(600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)
Inch series: 428 x 275mm
(600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Front/Rear: Less than 4mm
Right/Left total: Less than 6mm at actual
(100%) size

Dot matrix LCD, touch panel

Size

Monochrome H-VGA 8.1

Display dot number

640 x 240 (H-VGA)

LCD drive display area

192 x 72mm

LCD backlight

Fluorescent lamp backlight system

LCD contrast adjustment

Yes

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1

(3) Automatic document feeder

D. Scanner section

Type

(1) Resolution/Gradation
Reading
resolution
(dpi)
Transmission
resolusion
(dpi)

Copy mode
Platen

400 x 600dpi

RSPF

400 x 600dpi

Scan speed

When in single copy

When in duplex copy

Copy

31-sheet model:
27 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
26 sheets/min
(400 x 600dpi)

31-sheet model:
13.6 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)
26-sheet model:
13.6 side/min
(400 x 600dpi)

Fax

40 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)

17 sheets/min
(Normal text, A4R)

Document set
direction

Face-up reference

Document standard
position

Center reference

Document transport
system

Sheet through system

Document size

AB series: A3 - A5
Inch series: 11 x 17 - 5.5 x 8.5

FAX transmission mode


Select mode

Normal
text

Fine
text

Super
fine
text

Ultra
fine
text

Input resolution:
OC

203.2
x
293.4

203.2
x
293.4

203.2
x
391.2

406.4
x
586.7

Input resolution:
RSPF

203.2
x
293.4

203.2
x
293.4

203.2
x
391.2

406.4
x
586.7

Transmission
resolution

203.2
x
97.8

203.2
x
195.6

203.2
x
391

406.4
x
391

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Half tone

RSPF
(Automatic duplex document feeder unit)

Reading
gradation

256 gradations

Document weight

Single face: 35 - 128g/m2, 9 - 34 lbs,


Duplex: 52 - 105g/m2, 13.9 - 28 lbs

Exposure
lamp

Electrodeless xenon lamp

100 sheets (90g/m2)


Paper thickness of 13mm or less can be set.

Output
gradation

Binary

Max. loading
capacity of
documents
Transport disable
document

OHP, perforated documents, photo,


catalogue, second original sheet, tracing
paper, carbon paper, heat-sensitive paper,
wrinkled paper, folded or broken paper,
pasted or cut-away paper, documents of
many perforated holes (2-hole, 3-hole
documents can be used), document printed
by an ink ribbon

Detection

Yes

Detection size

Inch
series

Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R

AB
series

Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5

(2) Document table


Type

Document table fixed type (Flat bed)

Scanning area

297 x 431.8mm

Original standard
position

Left bottom reference

Detection

Yes

Detection size

Inch
series

Automatic setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R

AB
series

Automatic setting
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
Manual setting
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5

Multi copy

S-S, S-D, D-D, D-S

Mixed paper feed

Enable (Same width only)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2

E. Paper feed section


Type

Paper feed tray + Multi manual paper feed (Expanded up to 4 trays by installing options.)

Paper feed method

Paper is fed from the above by the front loading system.

Details of paper feed section


Paper capacity

Standard paper
(80g/m2)

Paper size

Tray1

Tray2
500 sheets

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,


A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14,
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5x11R,
5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, 16KR

Paper size detection

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5R,


11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330),
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8K, 16KR
No

Manual paper feed tray


100 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A5,
B6R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13 (216 x 330), 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, 16KR, A6R, Envelope*1
Yes

Allowable paper type and weight for paper


feed

56 - 105g/m2/15 - 28lbs Bond

Multi paper feed:


Standard paper (56 - 128g/m2)
Special paper, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2)
Single paper feed:
Standard paper, special paper,
second original, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2), 56- 200g/m2 (14 - 54lbs)

Paper type

Standard paper (56 - 80g/m2)


Normal paper (60 - 105g/m2)
Letterhead
Color paper

Standard paper: 100 sheets


(56 - 80g/m2)
Recycled paper/coarse paper:
100 sheets
Heavy paper (max. 200g/m2):
30 sheets
OHP/Label sheet/gift wrapping
paper: 40 sheets
Label sheet: 40 sheets
Envelope (AB series: 10 sheets,
Inch series: 5 sheets)

Paper size setting when


shipping
Paper remaining detection

Inch series

8.5 x 11

---

AB series

A4

---

No (paper presence only)

1: Supported envelope kinds: Commercial10 (4 - 1/8 x 9 - 1/2), International DL (110mm x 220mm), International C5 (162mm x 229mm)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3

F. Paper exit section

H. Printer function

(1) Center tray of main unit

(1) Platform

Paper exit position/


system

Main unit top surface face-down paper


exit

Paper exit capacity

500 sheets (A4, 8.5 x 11, 80g/m2 paper)

Paper exit paper size/


kind

All kinds of paper which can be fed

Shifter function

Yes

Paper remaining
detection for paper exit

Yes

IBM PC/AT
Macintosh

(2) Support OS
OS
Windows

XP
Server 2003

No

Server 2003 x64

(1) Copy magnification ratio

Zoom

Yes

XP x64

G. Copy functions
Copy
magnification
ratio

SPLC

2000

Vista

AB
series

25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,


115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%

Inch
series

25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,


129%, 200%, 400%

25 - 400%
(Restriction by the document feeder unit: 50 - 200%)

Yes

Vista x64
Server 2008
Server 2008 x64
Mac

9.0 - 9.2.2
No

X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9

(2) Density/copy image quality process


Exposure mode

Binary: Automatic, Text, Text/Photo, Photo

Number of manual
steps

5 steps

X 10.4.11
X 10.5 - 10.5.6

I. Environmental conditions

(3) Duplex

(Humidity)

System

Switchback system

Paper size

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17,


8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R

Type and weight of


paper which can be
passed

56 - 105g/m2/15 - 21.3 lbs Bond


Duplex print from manual paper feed can be
made. (Except for heavy paper, OHP sheet,
and other special paper)

85%
60%

20%

When duplex printing is continued in a certain level of temperature,

the printing speed may be reduced in order to prevent an abnormal


temperature rise in the machine.

10 C

30 C

35 C

(Temperature)

(4) Copy functions


Automatic paper selection

Standard environmental
conditions

Automatic magnification ratio selection

Usage environmental
conditions

Vertical/horizontal independent magnification ratio


Paper type selection
Auto tray switching
Rotation copy
Electronic sort
Job reservation (only during warm-up)
Program call-out/registration (10 items)
Preheat function
Auto power shut off function
User management (100 items)
Mixed documents feed (MIX only)
Binding margin (Left/Right/Upper)
Edge erase/Center erase (Center/Edge/Center + Edge)
1 set 2 copy
Cover paper/Insert paper (Cover/Back cover only)
Multi shot (2 in 1/4 in 1) (Centering available)
Card shot (Centering available)
Pamphlet mode (Centering available)
Duplex copy direction switching
Large volume document mode
Black/white reverse (except for UK)
Stream feeding mode (ON/OFF switch by the system setting)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 4

Temperature
Humidity
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric
pressure

20 - 25C
65 5%RH
10 - 35C
20 - 85%RH
590 - 1013 hPa
(height: 0 - 2000m)

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS


1. Supply system table
A. East Europe/Russia
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (With IC chip)
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
2 Developer (black) Developer
(Developer; Net 300g)
3 Drum
Drum

1
1
1

Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K

Model name
Remarks
MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
Default: Toner save mode
MX-312GV
MX-312GR

B. Asia Subsidiaries
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (With IC chip)
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
2 Developer (black) Developer
(Developer; Net 300g)
3 Drum
Drum

1
1
1

Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K

Model name
Remarks
MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
Default: Toner save mode
MX-312AV
MX-312AR

C. SMEF/Agent
No.
Item
Content
1 Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (With IC chip)
(black)
(Toner; Net 700g)
2 Developer (black) Developer
(Developer; Net 300g)
3 Drum
Drum

1
1
1

Life
33K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K

Model name
Remarks
MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5"11") 6% document
Default: Toner save mode
MX-312FV
MX-312FR

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

2. Maintenance parts list


A. East Europe/Russia/SMEF
No.
1

Item

Content

Life

Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller


Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Thermistor cleaning pad
Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller
Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Fuser bearing (lower)
150K PM kit
Drum separation pawl unit
Transfer roller unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit
MC unit
MC unit

Cleaner blade

Cleaner blade

Drum frame unit

Drum frame unit

7
8

Transfer roller unit


Staple cartridge

Transfer roller unit


Staple cartridge

150K
1
1
2
1
4
2
1
300K
4
2
2
150K
1
1
1
1
1
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
10 26cpm: 75K
31cpm: 100K
1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K
1
3

Model
name
AR-310UH

Remarks

MX-311LH

MX-311KA

(10) MX-311MC
(10)
(10) MX-311CB
(10)
MX-311DU The life of the toner reception seat attached to
the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
150K
MX-311TX
5000 staples 3
MX-SCX1

The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

B. Asia Subsidiaries/Agent
No.

Item

Content

Life

Model
name

Remarks

Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller


Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Thermistor cleaning pad

1
1
2
1
4
2

150K

AR-310UH

Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller


Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Fuser bearing (lower)

1
4
2

300K

MX-311LH

150K PM kit

Drum separation pawl unit


Transfer roller unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner filter unit

2
1
1
1
1
1

150K

MX-311KA

MC unit

MC unit

10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311MC


31cpm: 100K (10)

Cleaner blade

Cleaner blade

10 26cpm: 75K (10) MX-311CB


31cpm: 100K (10)

Drum frame unit

Drum frame unit

1 26cpm: 225K
31cpm: 300K

MX-311DU The life of the toner reception seat attached to


the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)

Staple cartridge

Staple cartridge

MX-SCX1

5000 staples 3

The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

3. Developer/Drum life end definition


When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1.
Number of rotations
(Rotations)

Developer/drum counter
Developer/drum

26cpm model

31cpm model

75K

100K

550K

4. Production number identification


<Toner cartridge>

<Drum>

The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.

The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year,
month, day) of production.

Label position

Internal product name


Incompatibility

Destination

Version No.
Production year/month/day (6 digits)
Serial No. in production day (5 digits)
Production place (1 digits)

Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.

Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.

Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.

4, 5 Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.

<Developer>

5. Environment conditions
(Humidity)
85%
60%

8
20%

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the
developer bag.
1

Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.

Number
Indicates the production year.

3, 4 Number
Indicates the production month.
5, 6 Number
Indicates the production day.
7

Hyphen

Number
Indicates the production lot.

10 C

30 C

35 C

(Temperature)

Standard environmental
conditions
Usage environmental
conditions

Storage period

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3

Temperature
20 - 25C
Humidity
65 5%RH
Temperature
10 - 35C
Humidity
20 - 85%RH
Atmospheric
590 - 1013 hPa
pressure
(height: 0 - 2000m)
Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot)
under unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
month under unsealed state

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE


1. External view
1

7
16
4
5
12

11
9

17
13

10

14

19

18

20
21

15

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Name
Document feeder tray
Original guides
Document feeder cover
Reversing tray
Exit area
Document transport cover
Document transport cover knob
Document glass
Power switch
Handles
Operation panel
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Center tray
Front cover
Paper trays
Upper right side cover

17
18
19
20
21

Side cover
Side cover handle
Bypass tray paper guides
Bypass tray
Bypass tray extension

Function/Operation
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up here.
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull out to remove misfed originals.
Originals exit the machine here after copying.
Open to remove misfed originals.
Pull to open the document transport cover.
Place an original that you wish to scan face down here.
Press to turn the machine power on and off.
Use to move the machine.
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform machine maintenance.
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper.
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job separator tray kit or a optional finisher is
installed.
Open to remove misfeeds.
Pull to open the side cover.
Adjust to the width of the paper.
Regular paper and special paper (such as transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing paper in the bypass tray.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 1

2. Internal structure

4
5

No.
1
2
3
4

Name
Toner cartridge lock release lever
Toner cartridge
Roller rotating knob
Photoconductive drum

Function/Operation
Use to unlock the toner cartridge.
Contains toner.
Turn to remove misfed paper.
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive drum.

Fusing unit release levers

To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push up on these


levers and remove the paper.

Fusing unit paper guide

Open to remove misfed paper.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 2

Note

Do not touch the photoconductive


drum (green portion). Doing so
may damage the drum and cause
smudges on copies.
The fusing unit is hot.
Do not touch the fusing unit when
removing misfed paper.
Doing so may cause a burn or
injury.

3. Operation panel

COPY
ON LINE
DATA

PRINT

LINE
DATA

FAX

JOB STATUS

SYSTEM SETTINGS

LOGOUT

No.
1

Name
Touch panel

Mode select keys and indicators


[COPY] key
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/
DATA indicator

[FAX] key/LINE indicator/


DATA indicator

3
4

[JOB STATUS] key


[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key

5
6

Numeric keys
[LOGOUT] key (

[#/P] key (

8
9
10

[CLEAR] key ( )
[CLEAR ALL] key (
[START] key ( )

11

[INTERRUPT] key (

Function/Operation
The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel.
The display will show the status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details see the next page.
Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
Press to select copy mode.
[PRINT] key: Press to select print mode.
ONLINE indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator: A print job is in memory. The indicator lights steadily while
the job is held in memory, and blinks while the job is printed.
[FAX] key: Press to select fax mode when the fax option is installed.
LINE indicator : This lights up while faxes are being sent or received.
DATA indicator: Blinks when a fax has been received to memory and lights
steadily when a fax is waiting in memory for transmission.
Press to display the current job status.
Use to adjust various settings of the machine including the contrast of the touch
panel and administrator settings.
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key after finishing a job to return the
machine to account number entry standby.
Use this key to execute a job program in copy mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a job.
Resets the settings to the initial settings.
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to begin copying, network
scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has activated. Press the key to
return to normal operation.
Use to perform an interrupt copy job.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 3

10

11

Note

When the fax option is


installed.

4. RSPF
A. External view

1
2
3

5
4

No.
1
2
3
4
5

Name
Document set tray
Document guide
Document feed section cover
Document transport section cover
Document exit section

B. Internal structure

11
10
9

8
7

3
5
6

14
12

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Code
EMPS
FGOD
DFCL
DFD
RSOL
CLH
DTM
GSOL

DLS1
DLS2
OPCLS
RDD
SWD

Name
Document set sensor
Open/close sensor
Paper feed clutch
Paper entry sensor
Pressure release solenoid
Transport clutch
SPF motor
Gate solenoid
Interface PWB
Document length detection SW (Short)
Document length detection SW (Long)
Book sensor
Paper exit sensor
Document width sensor

13
1

Type
Photo transmission
Photo transmission

Photo transmission

Stepping motor

Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Photo transmission
Volume

Function/Operation
Detects presence of documents.
Detects open/close of the paper feed unit.

Detects presence of documents.

Drives document feed on the tray, transport, and paper exit roller.

Detects the document length on the tray.


Detects the document length on the tray.
Detects the SPF float.
Detects presence of documents.
Detects the document width on the tray.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 4

5. Sensor

No.
18

19

2
3

25

20

5
21
22

6
7

23
24

25

Name
2nd tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper empty
sensor
1st tray paper pass
sensor
1st tray paper upper
limit detection sensor
1st tray paper empty
sensor
Toner sensor
Center tray paper
YES/NO sensor
Document size sensor

9
26

10
11
12
13

24
23
22
21

Reverse pass paper


detection sensor

Code
LUD2

Function and operation


2nd tray paper upper limit
detection
PED2 2nd tray paper empty
detection
PPD1H 1st tray paper pass
LUD1

1st tray paper upper limit


detection
PED1 1st tray paper empty
detection
Toner density detection
LOEMP Center tray paper YES/NO
detection
DSIN0 Document size detection
(Inch series: PD1, 2)
(AB series: PD1 3)
DUP2 Reverse pass detection

6. Switch

20
19
18

No.
1
2
3

4
5

6
7

8
9
10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17

Name
Mirror home position
sensor
Document cover
sensor
Document size
sensor
2nd paper exit sensor
(Option)
2nd paper exit full
detection sensor
(Option)
1st paper exit sensor
Shifter home position
sensor (Except North
America)
Paper exit sensor
(DUP side)
Thermistor
1st tray (paper tray)
detection
Manual feed paper
entry sensor

Manual paper feed


tray empty sensor 2
Manual paper feed
tray empty sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 1
Manual feed length
detection sensor 2
Manual feed paper
empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass
sensor

17

26 16

Code
MHPS
OCSW
DSIN3

POD2
TOPF

15 14

Function and operation


Mirror (scanner) home
position detection
Document cover open/close
detection
Document size detection
(Inch series: PD3, 4)
(AB series: PD4, 5)
2nd paper exit detection

2nd paper exit section full


detection

POD1 1st paper exit detection


SFTHP Shifter home position sensor
detection
PPD2

CD1
PPD1L

MPLS2
MPLS1
MPLD1
MPLD2
MPED
PFD2

Paper exit detection


Fusing temperature
detection
1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection
Sensor of paper entry from
the manual paper feed tray,
the 2nd/multi-tray desk, or
the DUP
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed tray position
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
Manual feed paper empty
detection
2nd tray paper pass

3
No.
1
2

Name
Right cabinet door
switch (Option)
Door switch

2nd right door switch

Main switch

Code
Function and operation
DSWR0 Right cabinet door open/
close detection
DSWR1 Front door and side door
open/close detection
DSWR2 Side door open/close
detection
PSSW Main power switch

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 5

7. Solenoid/Clutch

8. Drive motor
1

2
1
4
5

6
2
3
4
5
9
9

8
7
No.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Name
Paper exit gate
switching solenoid
(Option)
PS clutch
Paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
clutch
2nd tray paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Separation pawl
solenoid

Code
OGS

Function and operation


Paper exit gate switcher

RRC
CPFS1
MPFS

Main unit paper feed


Paper feed roller drive
Manual paper feed
solenoid
Paper feed transfer clutch

TRC2
CPFS2
CPFC2
CPFC1
PSPS

Solenoid for the paper feed


from the tray
Solenoid for the paper feed
from the tray
Separation pawl operation
solenoid

8
No.
1
2

Name
Mirror motor
Shifter motor
(Except North
America)
Duplex motor

DUP-2 motor

6
7
8
9

Main motor
Tray lift-up motor
Tray lift-up motor
Toner motor

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 6

Code
MIRM
SFTM

Function and operation


Optical mirror base drive
Shifter drive

DPXM

Duplex paper switching


and exit motor
Reverse pass for paper
transport
Main drive
Tray paper lift-up
Tray paper lift-up
Toner supply

MM
LUM1
LUM2
TM

9. Lamp

10. Fan/Filter
1

6
7
2
3

1
5
6
1
4

No.
1
2

Name
Copy lamp
Heater lamp

Function and operation


Image radiation lamp
Fusing heat lamp

No.
1
2
3
4

Name
Cooling fan
Exhaust fan motor
Intake fan motor
Fusing paper exit fan

Code
VFM
DCFM
DCFM2
VFM2

5
6
7

Fusing paper exit fan


Ozon filter
Ozon filter

VFM2

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 7

Function and operation


Cools the inside of the unit.
Cools the inside of the unit.
Cools the inside of the unit.
Cools the inside of the unit.
(31 sheet model)
Cools the inside of the unit.

11. PWB

12. Roller
1
1

3
12

11

5
6
7
8

10
5

9
10
11
12

14 13

9
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Name
Inverter PWB
CCD PWB
Option connector PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Mother board
Tray interface PWB
DC power supply PWB
High voltage PWB
KEY PWB
OPU PWB
SPLC PWB

Function and operation


Copy lamp control
For image scanning (read)
Image process
Main unit control
Connection with FAX PWB
2nd tray control
DC voltage control
High voltage control
Operation panel control
Output image signal

No.
1
2
3

Name
Paper exit roller
Transport roller
Upper heat roller

Lower heat roller

5
6
7

DUP transport follower


roller
DUP transport roller
Transport roller

Resist roller

Manual paper feed roller

10
11
12

Manual feed transport


roller
1st tray pick-up roller
1st tray paper feed roller

13
14

2nd tray pick-up roller


2nd tray paper feed roller

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 8

Function and operation


Paper exit roller
Paper transport roller
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on paper.
(with the silicone rubber roller)
Duplex paper transport
Duplex paper transport
Transfer images on the drum onto
paper.
Synchronize the paper lead edge
with the image lead edge.
Picks up papers in manual paper
feed port.
Transports paper from the manual
paper feed port.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
Picks up paper from the tray.
Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.

[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjustment item list
A

Section
Process section

Mechanism section

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)

(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)

Image density
(exposure) adjustment

(15)
(1)

Adjustment item
Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
Developing bias voltage adjustment
Grid bias voltage adjustment
Print start position adjustment
RSPF image lead edge position adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
Paper off center adjustment
Left edge void area adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
distortion adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment
Main scanning direction (FR direction)
magnification ratio adjustment
Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
magnification ratio adjustment

Adjustment procedure/SIM No.


Developing doctor gap adjustment
MG roller main pole position adjustment
SIM8-1
SIM8-2
SIM50-5
SIM50-6
SIM50-1
SIM50-10
SIM50-1-8
No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position
adjustment
Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment
Winding pulley position adjustment
Rail height adjustment
SIM48-1-1
a
b

Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)


OC (RSPF) open/close detection position
adjustment
Original sensor adjustment
RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment
(required in an RSPF model when replacing the
lens unit)
RSPF scan position auto adjustment
Copy mode

OC mode in copying (SIM 48-1-2)


RSPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM48-1-3, 48-1-4)
SIM50-12
SIM41-3
SIM41-2, 41-4 (41-1)
SIM63-7

SIM53-8
SIM46-2

2. Details of adjustment
A. Process section

2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.

(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment

3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three screws


on the developing docter as shown.

1) Remove the doctor cover.

R
A

C
A

F
A
4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock.
When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the

developing doctor and the MG roller.


<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap
+0.1mm

F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 1

(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment

(4) Grid bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-2)

1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.

1) Execute SIM 8-2.

2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.


3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct
adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjustment.)

SIMULATION 8-2

4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it
to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on
the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the
doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing
screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.


The current set value is displayed.
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
4) Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
<Adjustment specification>
Item

Content

A
9.1mm

SIMULATION 8-1
8-1
SIMULATION
DV BIAS COPY SETTING. INPUT VALUE 200-550, AND PRESS
START.
1: AE

426

426

2: TEXT

450

1/1

3: TEXT/PHOTO

450

4: PHOTO

450

5: SUPER/PHOTO

400

6: TONER SAVE

376

2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.


The current set value is displayed.

AE (145mm/s)

590

TEXT (145)

Character
(145mm/s)

590

TEXT/PHOTO
(145)

Character/Photo
(145mm/s)

590

PHOTO (145)

Photo (145mm/s)

590

TONER SAVE
(145)

Toner save
(145mm/s)

AE (122)

AE (122mm/s)

TEXT (122)

Character
(122mm/s)

590

TEXT/PHOTO
(122)

Character/Photo
(122mm/s)

590

PHOTO (122)

Photo (122mm/s)

590

10

TONER SAVE
(122)

Toner save
(122mm/s)

540

(1) Print start position adjustment

Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to
the original state.

TEXT (145)

TEXT/PHOTO
(145)
PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE
(145)
AE (122)

TEXT (122)

3
4
5

8
9
10

TEXT/PHOTO
(122)
PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE
(122)

1) Execute SIM 50-5.


SIMULATION 50-5

<Adjustment specification>

AE (145)

590

B. Mechanism section

4) Press the [START] key.

540

350750

Min. unit: 10V increment

3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.

Item

Default

AE (145)

(3) Developing bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-1)


1) Execute SIM 8-1.

Setting
range

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(PRINT). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS

Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character
(145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save
(145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character
(122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Toner save
(122mm/s)

Setting
range

Default
450
450

START.
1: TRAY1

53

53

2: OPTION

53

1/1

3: MANUAL

53

4: DUPLEX

53

450
450
200650

400
450

2) Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
3) Press the [P] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.

450

4) Select the paper feed tray, the print density, and the duplex mode.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

450

5) Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

450
400

Min. unit: 10V increment


AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 2

1
2
3
4

Item
TRAY1
OPTION
MANUAL
DUPLEX

Content

Setting range
0-99

1st tray
Option tray
Manual feed
Back print

Default

(2) RSPF image lead edge position adjustment


1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.

53

1-99

6) Measure the distance H between the paper lead edge and the
image print start position. Set the image print start position set
value again.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.
99 H/0.127 (mm) = Image print start position set value
<H: Print start position measurement value (mm)>

Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
paralleled with the edge lines.
2) Make a copy, then use the copy output as an original to make an
RSPF copy again.

0mm
0mm

3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.

4) Execute SIM 50-6.


10

5) Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that the same image
is obtained as that obtained in the previous OC image lead edge
position adjustment.
<Adjustment specification>

Fit the print edge with the paper edge, and perform the lead

edge adjustment.
Example:99 5/0.127 = 99 39.4 = about 59
Note: FIf the set value is not obtained from the above formula, perform the fine adjustment.
7) Execute SIM 50-1-2 to adjust the main tray lead edge void.
1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
Calculate the set value from the formula below.

Adjustment
mode
RSPF
image lead
edge
position

SIM

Set value

Spec value

50-6

1 step:
0.127mm
shift

Lead edge void:


1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm or less

Setting
range
1 99

(3) Rear edge void adjustment


1) Set a scale as shown in the figure below.
A4 (8.5" x 11")

B/0.127 (mm) = Lead edge void adjustment value


<B: Lead edge void (mm)>

2.5mm
5

2.5mm

10

Paper rear edge

2) Set the document size to A4 (8.5" x 11"), and make a copy at


100%.

Example: When setting the lead edge void to 2.5mm:


2.5 /0.127 = about 20

3) If an adjustment is required, follow the procedures below.

<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Main tray lead
edge void
Print start
position

SIM
50-1
-2
50-5

Void amount (Standard value: 4mm or less)

Set value
B/0.127
99 H/0.127

Spec value

Setting
range

Lead edge void:


1 4mm
Image loss: 3mm
or less

1 99

[H: Print start position measurement value (mm),


B: Lead edge void (mm)]

Scale image

Paper rear edge

4) Execute SIM 50-1 and set the density mode to DEN-B. The currently set adjustment value is displayed.
5) Enter the set value and press the start key.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Rear edge
void

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 3

SIM
50-1-6

Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift

Spec
value
4mm or
less

Setting
range
1 99

(4) Paper off center adjustment

(5) Left edge void area adjustment

1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table.


2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy.

Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the


paper off center adjustment (SIM 50-10) is completed.

3) Execute SIM 50-10.

1) Execute SIM 50-1.


SIMULATION 50-1

SIMULATION 50-10

LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND PRESS START.

PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND


PRESS START.
1: BYPASS

50

50

2: TRAY1

50

1/1

3: TRAY2

50

4: TRAY3

50

5: TRAY4

50

6: DUPLEX

50

Second
print surface
off-center

Set value

50-10
-2

Add 1: 0.127mm
shift to R side.

50-10
-6

Reduce 1:
0.127mm shift to L
side.

5: DEN-A -DUPLEX

18

6: DEN-B

7: DEN-B-DUP

50

8: SIDE VOID

18

9: SIDE VOID-DUP

18

10: LOSS(OC)

43
1/1

4) Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
5) Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 99: About
0.127mm/Step)

Setting range

Default

6) Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the


original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step).

1-99

50

7) Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)

<Adjustment specification>
SIM

18

3) Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no


void.)

7) Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

Adjustment
mode
Paper off
center

18

4: DEN-A -OPTION

2) Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.

6) Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print

2: DEN-A

18

OK

5) Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX

43

3: DEN-A -MANUAL

OK

4) Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

1
2
3
4
5
6

1: RRC-A

Spec value
Single:
Center
2.0mm
Duplex:
Center
2.5mm

Setting
range

1 99

9) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left


edge void is the specified value. (1 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
10) Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
11) If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 3.
Item

Content

RRC-A

DEN-A

DEN-A-MANUAL

DEN-A-OPTION

DEN-A-DUPLEX

6
7

DEN-B
DEN-B-DUP

SIDE VOID

SIDE VOID-DUP

10 LOSS(OC)

Original scan start position


adjustment
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(Manual feed tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
adjustment
(back of the machine)
Rear edge void adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
(Duplex)
Left edge void adjustment
(First print surface)
Left edge void adjustment
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)

Setting
Default
range
1-99
43

1-99

18

1-99

18

1-99

18

1-99

18

1-99
1-99

30
50

1-99

18

1-99

18

1-5

<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Left edge void

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 4

SIM
50-1
-8

Set value
1 step: 0.127mm
shift

Spec
value
0.5 4mm

Setting
range
1 99

(6) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion


balance adjustment
1) Remove the OC glass, the right cabinet and the upper right side
cover.

5) Without moving the scanner drive pulley shaft, manually turn the
scanner drive pulley until the positioning plate is brought into contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit, then fix the scanner drive pulley.

1
3

1
1

2
6

4
6) Put No. 2/3 mirror base unit on the positioning plate again, push
the projections on the front frame side and the rear frame side of
the copy lamp unit to the corner frame, and tighten the wire fixing
screw.

4
2) Loosen the copy lamp unit wire fixing screw.

Wire fixing screw


3) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley and bring No. 2/3 mirror
base unit into contact with the positioning plate.
At that time, if the front frame side and the rear frame side of No. 2/
3 mirror base unit are brought into contact with the positioning
plate at the same time, the mirror base unit parallelism is proper.
If one of them is in contact with the positioning plate, perform the
adjustment of 4).

(7) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) distortion


adjustment (Winding pulley position adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
When a copy as shown is made.
Lb

La

Paper exit
direction
Original

4) Loosen the set screw of the scanner drive pulley which is not in
contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit positioning plate.
AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 5

Copy

1) Set A3 (11" x 17") white paper on the original table as shown


below.

<Adjustment specification>
La = Lb
6) Execute the main scanning direction (FR) distortion balance
adjustment previously described in 2) again.

(8) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion


balance adjustment (Rail height adjustment)
When there is no skew copy in the mirror base scanning direction and
there is no horizontal error (right angle to the scanning direction), the
adjustment can be made by adjusting the No. 2/3 mirror base unit rail
height.

Place a little clearance from


the rear side original guide.

Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the horizontal


image distortion adjustment in the laser scanner section.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When the mirror base wire is replaced.
When the copy lamp unit and no. 2/3 mirror unit are replaced.
When the mirror unit rail is replaced and moved.
When a following copy is made.

Glass holding plate

A3 (11" x 17") white paper

Original

Copy A

Copy B

Fit the paper edge and


the glass holding plate edge.

2) Open the original cover and make a normal (100%) copy.


3) Measure the width of the black background at the lead edge and at
the rear edge.

1) Make an original for the adjustment.


Make test sheet by drawing parallel lines at 10mm from the both
ends of A3 (11" x 17") white paper as shown below. (These lines
must be correctly parallel to each other.)

Parallel line

Parallel line

10mm

10mm

10mm

10mm

Paper exit direction


La: Lead edge black background width
Lb: Rear edge black background width

White paper
If the width (La) of the black background at the lead edge is equal
that (Lb) at the rear edge, there is no need to execute the following
procedures of 4) 7).
4) Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the front frame
side or on the rear frame side.
When La < Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the front frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)

2) Make a normal (100%) copy of the test sheet on A3 (11" x 17")


paper. (Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.)
3) Measure the distances (La, Lb, Lc, Ld) at the four corners as
shown below.
La

Lc

When La > Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the rear frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)

Paper exit
direction

Rear side
A

Lb

Ld

When La = Lb and Lc = Ld, no need to perform the procedures 4)


and 5).

Front side

5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 6

4) Move the mirror base B rail position up and down (in the arrow
direction) to adjust.

<Adjustment specification>
Note: A judgment must be made with 200mm width, and must not be
made with 100mm width.
Adjustment
mode
Main scanning
direction
magnification
ratio

Spec value
At normal:
1.0%

SIM
481-1

Set value
Add 1: 0.1%
increase
Reduce 1: 0.1%
decrease

Setting
range
1 99

(10) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)


magnification ratio adjustment
(SIM 48-1-2, SIM 48-1-3)
a. OC mode in copying
Note: Execute the procedure after completion of SIM 48-1-1.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy.

When La > Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail upward by the half of the difference of
LaLb.
When La < Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LbLa.
Example: When La = 12mm and Lb = 9mm, shift the mirror base
B rail upward by 1.5mm.
When Lc >Ld
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of LcLd.
When Lc < Ld
When Lc < Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed side
upward.
When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail with

your hand.
<Adjustment specification>
La = Lb, Lc = Ld
5) After completion of adjustment, manually turn the mirror base drive
pulley, scan the mirror base A and mirror base B fully, and check
that the mirror bases are not in contact with each other.

2) Compare the scale image and the actual scale.


If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
3) Execute SIM 48-1-2.
4) Enter the set value and press the start key.
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification
ratio (OC mode)

Spec value

SIM

Set value

At normal:
1.0%

48-12

Add 1:
0.05% increase
Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease

Setting
range
1 99

b. RSPF mode in copying

contact with the frame or the original glass. Be careful to avoid this.

Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the


CCD unit is properly installed and that OC mode adjustment in
copying has been completed.

(9) Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification


ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1)

1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal (100%) copy to make a test chart.

If the mirror base rail is moved extremely, the mirror base may be in

Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the


CCD unit is properly installed.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below.

Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
parallel with the front side edge of the glass.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a normal (100%) copy.
2) Execute SIM 48-1.
3) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of
the main scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the
display section in 2 digits.
4) Manual correction mode (SIM48-1-1)
Enter the set value and press the start key.

3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.


If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
4) Execute SIM 48-1-3.
5) After warm-up, shading is performed.
The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section.

The correction value is stored and a copy is made.


AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 7

6) Enter the set value and press the start key.


The set value is stored and a copy is made.

<Adjustment specification>

7) Execute SIM 48-1-4.


The current back surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
is displayed in two digits on the display section.

3) If the distance is outside the specified range, adjust the open/close


sensor attachment plate position as shown below.

OC (SPF) open/close position A: 125 225mm

8) Enter the set value and press the start key.


The set value is stored and a copy is made.

Distance < 125mm: Shift toward A.


Distance > 225mm: Shift toward B.

<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification ratio
(RSPF mode)

Spec
value
At normal:
1.0%

SIM

Set value

48-1-3
48-1-4

Add 1:
0.05% increase

Setting
range
1 99

Reduce 1:
0.05% decrease

(11) Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)


Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
paper off center is properly adjusted.
1) Place the center position adjustment test chart (sheet with a
straight line in the scan direction at the center) on the RSPF.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray, and check
the printed copy with the test chart.
If any adjustment is required, perform the following procedure.
3) Execute SIM 50-12.

(13) Original sensor adjustment (SIM 41-2, 41-4)


1) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the OC table.
(Keep the SPF (OC cover) open.)

4) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of


the off center adjustment is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.

2) Execute SIM 41-2.

5) Enter the set value and press the start key.


The set value is stored and a copy is made.

4) Check the reaction with SIM 41-1.

<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Original off
center mode
(RSPF
mode)

Spec value

SIM

Set value

Single: Center
3.0mm
Duplex: Center
3.5mm

50-12

Add 1: 0.1mm
shift to R side
Reduce 1: 0.1mm
shift to L side

Setting
range
1 99

(12) OC (RSPF) open/close detection position adjustment


1) Execute SIM 41-3.
2) Gradually close the OC (RSPF) from the full open position, and
measure distance A when the display on the operation panel
changes. (See the figure below.)

3) Keep A=125mm, and execute SIM 41-4. (Do not put paper on the
table.)

(14) RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment


(required in an RSPF model when replacing the lens
unit) (SIM63-7)
1) Fully open the RSPF.
2) Execute SIM 63-7.
3) When the operation panel displays "COMPLETE," the adjustment
is completed.
4) If the operation panel displays "ERROR," perform the following
measures.
When the display is 0:
Check that the SPF is open.
Check that the lamp is ON. (If the lamp is OFF, check the MCU connector.)
Check that the CCD harness is properly inserted into the MCU connector.
When the display is 281 or above:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.

Distance A = Table glass top - OC (RSPF) handle rib

3) Slide the lens unit toward the front side and attach it, then execute SIM.
When the display is 143 or below:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
3) Slide the lens unit toward the rear side and attach it, then execute
SIM.

When the lens unit is moved, execute the OC main scanning magni-

fication ratio auto adjustment, SIM 48-1-1.


This adjustment is basically O.K. with SIM 63-7.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 8

(15) RSPF scan position auto adjustment

C. Image density (exposure) adjustment

[Function]

(1) Copy mode (SIM46-2)

Used to adjust the RSPF scan position automatically.

1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the OC table as shown


below.

[Operation]
1) With the RSPF or the OC cover open, place a white paper background on the OC glass. (In the RSPF standard model, the RSPF
glass surface is included.)

Rear

2) Enter SIM53-08, and press [START] button.


Outline of SIM: The optical unit is shifted to recognize the boundary between the OC glass and the RSPF glass cover.
With the same position as the reference, the RSPF scan position is
automatically adjusted.
<Note>
After completion of the RSPF scan position auto adjustment, the
RSPF lead edge adjustment must be executed. (Both surfaces)
There must be no other sheet than the black chart on the glass surface.
Especially when in RSPF scan, the center area is scanned in the
main scan direction. Be careful to prevent external light from entering the scan area.
3) Check that the lead edge is not shifted. (Both surfaces)
(If the original lead edge adjustment has been made properly, even
when the scan position is shifted, it is followed automatically.)

Front

2) Place three or more sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper on the test


chart.
3) Execute SIM 46-2.
4) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of
the density (exposure) level is displayed on the display section in 2
digits.
For mode selection, use the [10-key].

Place only the white


paper on the OC glass.

For the RSPF standard-provision


machine, check that the white
paper covers the SPF glass.

5) Change the set value with the [10-key] to adjust the copy image
density.
6) Make a copy and check that the specification below is satisfied.
Note: Place originals in the rear reference, and the test chart in the
front reference when adjusting the exposure.
<Adjustment specification>
Exposure
level

Sharp Gray
Chart output

AUTO

"3" is copied.

TEXT

3.0

"3" is copied.

TEXT/PHOTO

3.0

"3" is copied.

PHOTO

3.0

"2" is copied.

AE
(TONER SAVE)

"3" is copied.

TEXT
(TONER SAVE)

3.0

"3" is copied.

TEXT PHOTO
(TONER SAVE)

3.0

"3" is copied.

Density mode
Placing the white paper
The white chart must cover
this area.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 9

Set value
If too bright,
increase the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.
If too dark,
decrease the
quantity displayed
on the copy
quantity display.

Setting
range

1 99

[6] SIMULATION
1. General

B. Code-type simulation

A. Outline and purpose

(1) Operating procedures and operations

The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage,
and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the
serviceability of the machine.

* Entering the simulation mode

1) Various adjustments

3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON

2) Setup of specifications and functions

4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.

3) Canceling troubles

5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.

1) #/P key (program) ON Asterisk (*) key ON CLEAR key ON


Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON

4) Operation check

Press START key to start the simulation operation.

5) Various counters check, setup, and clear

To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main code


and the sub code, press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.

6) Machine operating status (operation history) data check, clear


7) Transfer of various data (adjustments, setup, operations, counters)

* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

The operating procedures and the displays differ depending on the


form of the operation panel of the machine.

1) Press CLEAR ALL key.

(2) How to change the simulation adjustment value set by


the touch panel in the adjustment value entry process
a. Target SIM list
3-7, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 9-5, 43-1, 44-34, 46-2, 46-9, 46-10,
46-11, 46-18, 46-20, 46-30, 46-31, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-1, 51-2, 51-9, 53-7

b. Touch panel operating procedure


In the adjustment value setup menu, the selected item is highlighted.
Change is made to the highlighted simulation adjustment value.
If all the list of the adjustment items is not shown on one page, touch
[] and [] button to shift the page.
To change an adjustment value, touch the select the item to change
the adjustment value. (The selected item is highlighted.) Enter the
adjustment value and perform one of the following procedures, and
the display of the adjustment value of the selected item is renewed
as well as the adjustment value.
1) Touch [OK] button.
2) Touch another selected item to change the selection state.
3) If all the list of the adjustment items cover two or more pages,
touch [] and [] button to shift the page.
4) Press [START] key.
* For simulations which allow confirmation print, copying is started
after changing the adjustment value.
(46-2, 46-9, 46-10, 46-11, 46-18, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-2, the bold-faced items in the above list.)
* If the entry value is outside the adjustable range, an error buzzer
sounds and the adjustment value is not renewed. Page shift is not
made, either.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 1

START (Normal mode)


L1

Press the #/P key.

In the cause of SIM which is set by touch panel, the


changed content can be stored by the following key, touch.
[OK] key
Other item selection
key

Press the START key.

Press the asterisk (*) key.


1

Press the clear key.

The changed content


is stored.

Press the asterisk (*) key.


Do you
want to end the
simulation ?

Standby for entry of


SIM code.

YES

Press the clear all key.


NO

Enter the main code of


SIM with the 10-key.

The simulation mode


is canceled.

The main code of SIM


is displayed.

Returns to START
(Normal mode).

Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?

Press the START key.

NO

2
YES

Is there a sub code ?

NO

Press the SYSTEM


SETTINGS key

YES

Standby for entry of


SIM sub code.

YES

Is it the same
simulation ?

Enter the sub code of


SIM with the 10-key.

3
NO

Press the SYSTEM


SETTINGS key

Press the START key.

Is there a item
selection?

NO

YES

Select the mode and the


item with the key
and the item key.

YES

Operation check ?
Press the START key.
NO

Operation is made according


to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?

YES

If "Operation condition check"


refer to "Sensor display", this
process is not necessary.

Press the START key.


NO

Operation is made according


to the selected mode and item.
Data clear ?

YES

Press the START key.


Select "YES".

NO

The selected mode and


the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?

NO

YES

The display is made according


to the selected mode and the item.

Do you
want to change the
content ?
YES

Operation is made according


to the select ed mode and the it
(Other modes)

NO

Enter the new setting and


adjustment values.
L1

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 2

2. Simulation code list


Code
Main
Sub
1
1
2
1
2

2
3
2
3

10

11

2
4
3
1
5

2
3
1

6
2
7

1
6
8
1

10
8
11

13

14
1
9

4
5

10

Code
Main
Sub
Function

Used to check the operation of the scanner unit


and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
in the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and
the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the loads in the
RSPF unit and the control circuits.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
in the finisher and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
finisher and the control circuit.
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously
performed or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or
moved in one way by the specified steps.)
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
in the option tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the
option tray and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the display (LED),
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and
the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and
the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches
and solenoids) in the paper transport system and
the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and
its control circuit.
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Used to set the display of the warm-up time.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in each printer mode and
the control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the
control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex motor RPM setting
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation
to normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
its control circuit.

14

16
17
21

0
0
1
1

3
4
5

22

6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
19

2
3
4
24

5
6
7
9
10
15

1
25
2
26

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 3

Function
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF
troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
count value with the total counter value.)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
Used to check the ROM version of each unit
(section).
Used to print each system setting, the account
information, and the machine adjustment values.
Used to display of the administrator password.
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Used to check the number of use of each paper
feed section. (the number of prints)
Used to check the system configuration.
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
number of misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to display the CRUM type.
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed
history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history.
(The counters are cleared after completion of
maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of
prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Used to reset the developer counter.
(The developer counter of the DV unit which is
installed is reset.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed
when the OPC drum is replaced.)
Used to clear the printer counter and other
counters.
FAX counter data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor.
(The toner concentration sensor output can be
monitored.)
Used to make the initial setting of toner
concentration when replacing developer.
Used to set whether the job separator is installed
or not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)

Code
Main
Sub
2
3
5
6
12
14
18
22
30

35

26

36
37
38
50
56
57
60

71

72

1
30
2

1
40

2
3
1
2

41
3
4

Function
Used to set whether the automatic detection of
paper size is made or not.
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use
condition of the auditor.
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and
the maintenance counter.
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
Used to input the Software Key for the PS
extension kit.
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.
Used to set the specification (language display) for
the destination.
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up
control conforming to the CE mark control.
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles
are displayed as one trouble or the series of
troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles
occur continuously.
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the developer counter life is expired.
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the drum counter life is expired.
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white
reversion function.
Gamma life correction setting
Used to set the model code.
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key
when FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed,
the FAX mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (preheat mode setting) and the auto power shut off
time can be set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1
min, auto power shut off: 1 min) and the long time
setup (pre-heat: 15min, auto power shut off:
60min).
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the
set value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction
setting) is set to Setting Enable accordingly.
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Used to display the status of the sensors attached
to the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use
SIM 4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual
feed tray.
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper
width detector detection level.
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document
size photo sensor.
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20
degrees.

Code
Main
Sub
1
43
10
1
2
3
9
14
44

16
17
34
40
2
9

10

11
12
13
46

14
15
16
18
19
20
30
31
39
1
2

48
3
8
9
1
5
50

6
8
9

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 4

Function
Used to set the fusing temperature.
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when
printing postcards.
Used to make various setups in each mode of
process control.
Drum life correction setting
Used to set the DV count correction.
Used to display the process control correction
information.
Used to display the environment (temperature,
humidity) correction information.
Used to set the toner density control correction
value.
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Used to set the transfer current value in each
mode.
Used to set the time from the start of the main
motor rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply
in previous rotation after turning on the power.
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure
mode.
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text).
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text/Photo).
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Photo).
FAX exposure level adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
Used to set the control method of the exposure
mode.
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification
ratio (main/sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on the print paper in the print mode.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
on print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)

Code
Main
Sub
10
50
12
1

2
51
8
9

7
53
8

55

9
10
1

61

1
1

63
7

64

1
1

65

2
5
1
2

66

3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Code
Main
Sub

Function
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto
the resist roller in each section (copier paper feed
section, duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper
feed section). (When the print image position
varies greatly for the paper or when a lot of paper
jam troubles occur, the adjustment is required.)
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl
operation inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage
ON/OFF timing.
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF
width. The adjustment method is the 4-point
system. Set the guide to Max. (A3/WLetter)
position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R
position, and Min. position for adjustment.
Used to enter the RSPF width detection
adjustment value.
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the
mirror unit automatically. For the RSPF scan
position automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is
shifted to 11mm before the RSPF glass cover
edge, and is operated automatically to scan
images by the unit of 1 step, detecting the position
up to the glass cover automatically.
RSPF read position adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment
Used to set the soft switch.
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start
pixel position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display
section) detection position adjustment result.
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX PWB memory check
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
Printing the confidential password
Print the screen memory contents
Image data memory clear
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Max.)
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
Used to register the dial numbers.
Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
Used to perform the dial test. (20 PPS send test)
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)

17
18

66

19
20
21
22
24
30
31
32
33
34
37
41
52

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 5

Function
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Max.)
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
FAX information print
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
Receive data check
Signal detection check
Communication time measurement display
Speaker sound volume adjustment
CI signal check
Pseudo-ringer check

3. Details of simulation

2-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

1
1-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its
control circuit.
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation

Operation/procedure
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The scanner unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Set number of times

25% to 400% (1% increment)


(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
RSPF
Operation

Operation/procedure
The operations of sensors and detectors in the RSPF section are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
(For the original size, the detection result of the original size displayed
on the copy menu is highlighted.)
EMPS
DLS1
DLS2
FGOD
DFD
RDD
OPCLS
SWD_LEN
SWD_A/D

Original empty sensor


Original length sensor (Small)
Original length sensor (Large)
RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor
RSPF paper entry sensor
RSPF original exit sensor
Book sensor
Original detection width sensor
(Unit of 0.1mm. Width x 10 is displayed. Example: For
300mm, 3000 is displayed.)
Original detection width sensor A/D value

RSPF width detection size (One of the following is displayed.)


A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, EXTRA, 8K/16K,
16KR

1-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation

Operation/procedure
The status of sensors and detectors in the scanner section is displayed. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
MHPS

Mirror home position sensor

Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.


2-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the loads in the RSPF
unit and the control circuits.
RSPF
Operation

Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.

The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.
(20 times)

2-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and the
related circuit.
RSPF
Operation

Operation/procedure

1
2
3
4
5
6

Item
DTM-F
DTM-R
DFCL
CLH
GSOL
RSOL

Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.

Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The RSPF unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
Set magnification ratio
Document size
Duplex
Set number of times

Content
RSPF motor forward rotation
RSPF motor reverse rotation
RSPF paper feed clutch
RSPF PS clutch
Document exit gate solenoid
Document exit pressure solenoid

50% to 200% (1% increment)


(Default 100%)
Varies depending on the destination.
Selectable only when RSPF is installed.
1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)

Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 6

3-10

3
3-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
the finisher and the related circuit.
Finisher
Operation

Purpose

Adjustment

Function
(Purpose)

Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.

Item

Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Select an item to be adjusted with 10-key, and press [START] key.
2. Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key.

Operation/procedure
Used to display the operations of sensors and detectors in the finisher
section.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
FDTPD
FSTPD
FAPHPS-R
FAPHPS-F
FDRPS
FPPD1
FDTLLS
FTPS
FPLD
FSSW
FSLD
FSED
FSHPS
FPRD
FPLS

Paper delivery tray paper detector


Staple tray paper detector
Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
Delivery roller position sensor
Paper pass detector
Delivery tray lower limit sensor
Tray position sensor
Paper level detector
Safety switch
Staple lead edge detector
Staple empty detector
Staple HP sensor
Process tray paper rear edge detection
Paper level sensor

Item
FPAM ADJUST

Paper alignment
width adjustment

40-60

50

FDRLM ADJUST

Paper delivery roller


descending position
adjustment

40-60

50

Operation test/check
Used to check the shifter operation.
Reciprocating operations are continuously performed
or the home position is checked.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or moved in
one way by the specified steps.)
Operation

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Operation/procedure
Select item 1, and press the [START] key.
The shifter is reciprocated continuously at the specified interval.
1
2

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher
and the control circuit.
Finisher
Operation

Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
The finisher main motor operates for 10sec, the staple motor 5 times,
the tray lift-up motor one reciprocating operation, other motors max. 20
reciprocating operations from the home position, the solenoid repeats
500msec ON and 500msec OFF 20 times.

Item
F-R
HP CHECK

Content
Reciprocating operation
Home position check

[Selection 2]
1. Select item 2, and press the [START] key.
2. Move the shifter to the home position or in one way by the specified steps with the following keys.
[*] key
[0 key
[#] key
SFTHP

Shifts the position toward R side by the specified steps.


Shifts the position toward HP side by the specified steps.
Shifts to F.
Shifter home position (At detection, highlighted)

The staple operation motor operates only when there is no cartridge


installed.
Item
FTLM
FSM
FPAM-R
FPAM-F
FPDM
FPS
FPTM
FDRLM
FPGS
FARLS
FSL

Default

Purpose

3-3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Installation
range

3-11

Note: Executable only when the finisher is installed.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Content

Content
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Paper alignment motor R
Paper alignment motor F
Paper delivery motor
Paddle solenoid
Paper transport motor
Delivery roller lift motor
Paper gate solenoid
Alignment roller lift solenoid
Staple light

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 7

4-2

5-1

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
the option tray and the related circuit.
Paper feed
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the display (LED), LCD
in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Operation (screen/operation)
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

The operating states of the sensor and the detector are displayed.
(Only the installed option trays are displayed. For the standard tray,
use SIM 30-2.)

The LCD is displayed as follows. (All LEDs are ON.)


With the upper half highlighted and the lower half normally displayed,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.

The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.


PED2
LUD2
PFD2
CD2
PED3
LUD3
PFD3
CD3
PED4
LUD4
PFD4
CD4
DSWR2
DSWR3
DSWR4

2nd tray paper empty sensor


2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
3rd tray paper empty sensor
3rd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
3rd tray paper pass sensor
3rd tray empty sensor
4th tray paper empty sensor
4th tray paper upper limit detection sensor
4th tray paper pass sensor
4th tray empty sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
3rd tray right door detection sensor
4th tray right door detection sensor

(6 sec later)
With the upper half normally displayed and the lower half highlighted,
contrast changes Standard MAX MIN. in every 2sec.

Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.

* When returning to the sub menu selection menu, the display of the
standard contrast is displayed for an instant.

4-3

5-2

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the load in the option
tray and the control circuit.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the
control circuit.
Fusing
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.

1. Select the lamp to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.

The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.

ON/OFF operation of the heater lamp is repeated 5 times in an interval


of 100ms/900ms.
When completing the operation, the cooling fan is rotated at a low speed.

The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened. (20 times)
1
2
3
4

Item
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2

DM

6
7
8
9
10
11
12

LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4

Content
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
2nd tray paper transport motor
(3rd tray paper transport motor)
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch

Item Content
1
2

Item
HL1
HL2

Content
Heater lamp 1 (Main) operation
Heater lamp 2 (Sub) operation

5-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the
control circuit.
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation

Operation/procedure

Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed.

When the [START] key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 10sec.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 8

6-1

7-1

Purpose

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and
solenoids) in the paper transport system and the
control circuit.
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation/procedure

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Setting/Operation test/check
Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Select the load to be set with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.

1. Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.

When selected without setup, the selected value is registered and


highlighted. When selected with previous setup, the previous setup is
canceled and it is displayed normally.

The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.
(20 times)

Press [CA] key, and the simulation will be terminated and the machine
goes into the aging standby mode with the set content.

When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] is pressed, the operation is interrupted.

This setting is canceled by power OFF.

The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Item
LUM1
CPFC1
CPFS1
MPFS
RRC
PSPS
OGS
LUM2
CPFC2
CPFS2
TRC2
LUM3
CPFC3
CPFS3
TRC3
LUM4
CPFC4
CPFS4
ROGS

Content
1st tray lift-up motor
1st tray pick-up solenoid
1st tray paper feed clutch
Manual feed pick-up solenoid
Resist roller clutch
Separation pawl solenoid
Paper exit gate switching solenoid
2nd tray lift-up motor
2nd tray pick-up solenoid
2nd tray paper feed clutch
2nd tray transport roller clutch
3rd tray lift-up motor
3rd tray pick-up solenoid
3rd tray paper feed clutch
3rd tray transport roller clutch
4th tray lift-up motor
4th tray pick-up solenoid
4th tray paper feed clutch
Right paper exit gate solenoid

Item
AGING
MISFEED

FUSING*1

INTERVL

WARMUP

DV CHK.

Content
Aging enable/disable setting
Jam detection enable/disable setting
Fusing operation enable/disable setting
The fusing temperature is not controlled.
The heater is not turned ON.
Intermittent setting (Valid only when set to AGING.)
Warm-up save setting
The machine goes into the ready state only by
shading, disregarding fusing and process control.
After going into the ready state, normal control is
performed.
Developing unit detection enable/disable setting

*1: When the machine exits from the fusing ignoring state, the roller
may be cooled down. Therefore, reset the machine to warm up
again.
When, therefore, the simulation is canceled by pressing the [CA]
key or when the copy mode display is shifted to the initial menu
display in the simulation mode of one page copy, the machine is
reset.
Note: In SIM 7-1, pressing [CA] key terminates the simulation and the
machine enters the aging mode without resetting. Therefore, to
perform 4. Intermittent setup, the intermittent cycle must be set
with SIM 7-6 in advance.
Reset is not performed when the machine enters the aging mode.

The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.


6-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

1
2

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its
control circuit.
Others
Operation

7-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Setting/Operation test/check
Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
The selected load is operated for 10sec.

1. Enter the interval aging cycle time (sec) with the 10-key pad.
Refer to SIM 7-1.

Item
1

VFM

DCFM&DCFM2

VFM2

VFM&DCFM&DCFM2
&VFM2

Content
Fusing fan operates
Power cooling fan, power cooling fan 2
operations
Fusing exit paper fan operates
Fusing fan, power cooling fan, and
power cooling fan 2 are operated at the
same time.

2. Press the [START] key.


When the [START] key is pressed in aging, copying is performed continuously. This simulation is used to set the time interval between copy
operations in the unit of second.
This setting is valid when SIM 7-1 (Intermittent setting) is enabled.
Setting range
Default

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 9

1-255
3

8-2

7-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting/Operation test/check

Purpose

Used to set the display of the warm-up time.

Function
(Purpose)

Operation

Operation/procedure
Section

1. Warm-up starts by the cover open/close.


(Can be performed repeatedly by open/close of the cover.)
2. The warm-up time is counted up and displayed in the unit of sec.
If the [CA] key is pressed at this time, count-up is interrupted to terminate the simulation. (However, warm-up is continued.)
3. After completion of warming up, WARM UP COMPLETED is displayed and the control returns to the initial screen.

Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
The current set value is displayed.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
3. Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.

Item

8-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.


3. Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to the
original state.
Item
1
2

AE (145)
TEXT (145)

TEXT/PHOTO (145)

4
5
6
7

PHOTO (145)
TONER SAVE (145)
AE (122)
TEXT (122)

TEXT/PHOTO (122)

9
10

PHOTO (122)
TONER SAVE (122)

Content
AE (145mm/s)
Character (145mm/s)
Character/Photo
(145mm/s)
Photo (145mm/s)
Toner save (145mm/s)
AE (122mm/s)
Character (122mm/s)
Character/Photo
(122mm/s)
Photo (122mm/s)
Toner save (122mm/s)

Setting
range

Default
450
450

200650

450
450
400

AE (145)

AE (145mm/s)

590

TEXT (145)

Character (145mm/s)

590

TEXT/PHOTO (145)

Character/Photo
(145mm/s)

590

PHOTO (145)

Photo (145mm/s)

590

TONER SAVE (145)

Toner save (145mm/s)

AE (122)

AE (122mm/s)

TEXT (122)

Character (122mm/s)

590

TEXT/PHOTO (122)

Character/Photo
(122mm/s)

590

PHOTO (122)

Photo (122mm/s)

590

10

TONER SAVE (122)

Toner save (122mm/s)

540

350750

540
590

Min. unit: 10V increment


() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.
Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
8-10
Purpose

Adjustment/Operation test/check

Function
(Purpose)

Used to check and adjust the operation of the


developing bias voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.

Section

Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
The current set value is displayed.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

() Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.


Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.

Default

450
450
400
450
450

Setting
range

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
The current set value is displayed.

Content

3. Press the [START] key.

The minimum increment is 10V.


The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 10

Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
Item

Content

Installa
tion
range

8-13
Purpose

Default

Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper

DENS1 (145)

Density1 (145mm/s)

300

DENS2 (145)

Density2 (145mm/s)

370

DENS3 (145)

Density3 (145mm/s)

420

DENS4 (145)

Density4 (145mm/s)

530

Operation/procedure

DENS5 (145)

Density5 (145mm/s)

600

1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

TS (145)

Toner save (145mm/s)

250

2. Press the [START] key.

DENS1 (122)

Density1 (122mm/s)

300

DENS2 (122)

Density2 (122mm/s)

370

Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
returns to the original state.

DENS3 (122)

Density3 (122mm/s)

420

10 DENS4 (122)

Density4 (122mm/s)

530

200650

11 DENS5 (122)

Density5 (122mm/s)

600

12 TS (122)

Toner save (122mm/s)

250

The minimum increment is 10V.


The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.

Section

Setting range
Default

200-650
450

The minimum increment is 10V.


The result of (Set value-200) / 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value 10
+200) is used as the set value.
Therefore, an even number must be entered. If not, the entered odd
number +1 is displayed after pressing [START] key.
8-14

8-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
control circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.


The current set value is highlighted.

1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
returns to the original state.

2. Press the [START] key.

3. Press the [START] key.

Setting range
Default

Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
Item

Content

Installa
tion
range

350-750
590

Default

DENS1 (145)

Density 1 (145mm/s)

440

DENS2 (145)

Density 2 (145mm/s)

510

DENS3 (145)

Density 3 (145mm/s)

560

DENS4 (145)

Density 4 (145mm/s)

670

DENS5 (145)

Density 5 (145mm/s)

740

TS (145)

Toner save (145mm/s)

DENS1 (122)

Density 1 (122mm/s)

DENS2 (122)

Density 2 (122mm/s)

510

DENS3 (122)

Density 3 (122mm/s)

560

Operation/procedure

10 DENS4 (122)

Density 4 (122mm/s)

670

1. Select the operation mode with the 10-key.

11 DENS5 (122)

Density 5 (122mm/s)

740

2. Press the [START] key.

12 TS (122)

Toner save (122mm/s)

390

The operation is performed for 30sec, and the display returns to the
original state.

Min. unit: 10V increment

350750

390
440

9-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Item
1

DMF145

DMF122

DMR145

DMR122

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 11

Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
Duplex
Operation

Content
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
(122mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
(122mm/s)

9-4

16

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Duplex motor RPM setting
Duplex
Operation

16-0
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key.
When the duplex motor setting is made, the duplex 2motor is also set
accordingly.
Setting range
Default

Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key.
2. When 1: YES is selected, U2 trouble is canceled.
(When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)

1-13
5

9-5

17

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation to
normal rotation of the duplex motor.

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to set.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
1
2
3
4

Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)


Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Trouble
Error

Item
145mm/s
122mm/s
RIGHT 145mm/s
RIGHT 122mm/s

Installation range

18-76

Item

Operation/Procedure

21
21-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its
control circuit.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper
Operation

Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key and operate the toner motor for 30 sec.

14

Setting
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Specifications
Counter

Operation/procedure
1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
Content

Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

26cpm
5K
10K
20K
25K
50K
75K (Default)
FREE

31cpm
5K
10K
50K
75K
100K
150K (Default) *
FREE

* When selecting 150K, maintenance message is displayed by implementing the following conditions.

14-0
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Cancel (Trouble, etc)


Used to cancel the self diag PF trouble.
Trouble
Error

2. When 1: YES is selected, PF trouble is canceled. (When 2: NO


is selected, the simulation is canceled.)

10-0

Section

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

1. Press the [START] key.

Default
18
18
50
50

10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

17-0

Maintenance count = 150K.

Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)


Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF troubles.
Trouble

Error

DV count = 100K
DR count = 100K
* When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part
reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the
replaced part's counter only.

Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key.
2. When 1: YES is selected, troubles other than U2 and PF are canceled. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 12

(Jam cause code)

22
22-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the counter value of each section.
Counter

Operation/procedure
Each counter is displayed.
TOTAL
MAINTENANCE
DEVE
DRUM
COPY
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS
FAX SEND
FAX RCV
FAX OUTPUT
DEVE RANGE
DRUM RANGE
DEVE ROLL
DRUM ROLL
DEVE LIFE
DRUM LIFE

Total counter
Maintenance counter
Developer counter
Drum counter
Copy counter
Printer counter
IMC counter
Duplex counter
The other counters
FAX Send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX print counter
Developer traveling distance counter
Drum traveling distance counter
Developer rotation counter (K)
Drum rotation counter (K)
Developer life meter (%)
Drum life meter (%)

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Jam contents
1st tray pick-up miss
2nd tray pick-up miss
3rd tray pick-up miss
4th tray pick-up miss
Multi manual feed pick-up miss
Paper-in sensor lead edge jam
Paper-in sensor rear edge jam
Paper-in sensor reverse jam
Duplex sensor lead edge jam
Duplex sensor rear edge jam
PS time out jam
Right paper exit lead edge jam
Right paper exit rear edge jam
Upper tray paper exit lead edge jam
Upper tray paper exit rear edge jam
Lower tray paper exit lead edge jam
Lower tray paper exit rear edge jam
Abnormality between PS papers.
2nd paper pass lead edge jam
2nd paper pass rear edge jam
3rd paper pass lead edge jam
3rd paper pass rear edge jam
4th paper pass lead edge jam
4th paper pass rear edge jam
Duplex short scale error
Finisher entry port sensor not-reached jam
Finisher entry port sensor remaining jam
Finisher paper exit remaining jam
Finisher staple jam

22-4

22-2
Purpose

Item
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
BPT
PPD1_ND
PPD1_ST
PPD1_DUP
PPD2_ND
PPD2_ST
PPD_PRI
POD3_ND
POD3_ST
POD2_ND
POD2_ST
POD1_ND
POD1_ST
PINT_SHORT
PFD2_ND
PFD2_ST
PFD3_ND
PFD3_ST
PFD4_ND
PFD4_ST
SIZE_SHORT
FPPD1_N
FPPD1_S
FSTPD_S
FSTPLJ

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair. The misfeed
rate is obtained by dividing this count value with the
total counter value.)
Trouble

Operation/procedure

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
Trouble

Operation/procedure
The trouble error codes are displayed in the sequence of the latest one
first. Max. 40 items of information are stored. (Older ones are deleted
in sequence.) The machine condition can be estimated by this data.

Each counter data are displayed.


PAPER JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE

JAM counter
RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter

22-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

The counter display is in 7 digits.


22-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/Setting/Check
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Software

Operation/procedure
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position. (When the number of
misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Trouble
Mis-feed

Operation/procedure
The misfeed history is displayed in the sequence of recentness by the
name of sensors and detectors. Max. 40 items of information can be
stored in memory. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) The trouble
section may be determined by the data.

Used to display the ROM version of each section.


[Display example]
ROM version 1.250 [1.25] (up to 2 decimal places)
The display of the protocol monitor and the soft SW follows this display.
S/N

Machine serial number

MCU

Main Control Unit

IMC

IMC

OPE

Panel + Panel label code

PRINTER

PRINTER

NIC

NIC

FINISHER

FINISHER

FAX

FAX

If it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.


AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 13

Panel
display
JPN

EFS

EEU

NEU

Destination
Japan
SEC
SECL
SUK
SCA/SCNZ
Distributor
area
SEEG/
SEA/East
Europe,
etc.
SEF/
SEES/
SEIS/SEN,
etc.

CHN

SOCC

TWN

Taiwan

ARB

Saudi
Arabia

FAS

Iran

Panel software support language


Japanese, American English, English

American English, English, French, Spanish,


Brazilian Portuguese

22-7
Purpose

User data output/Check (Display/Print)

Function
(Purpose)

Used to display of the administrator password.

Item

Data

User data

Operation/procedure
Used to display the administrator password.

English, German, Polish, Czech, Hungarian,


Greek, Turkish, Russian, French, Italian,
Slovak
English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch,
Italian, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian,
Finnish, Danish

22-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to display the original, staple counter.
Counter

Operation/procedure
Simplified Chinese, American English,
English, Japanese
Traditional Chinese (Local support),
American English, English
American English, English, French, Spanish,
Hebrew (Local support), Arabic
English, Arabic, Persian, American English,
French, Spanish

Each counter is displayed.


SPF
SCAN
STAPLE

RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter

The counter display is in 7 digits.

22-9
Purpose

22-6
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
(display/print)
Used to print each system setting, the account
information, and the machine adjustment values.
Data
Setting/adjustment data

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Operation/Procedure

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the number of use of each paper feed
section. (the number of prints)
Paper feed
Counter

Operation/procedure
Used to display each paper feed counter.

(Initial screen)
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item.
1. Select the adjustment item with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu and the set value is stored.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.

BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4

Manual feed counter


Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter

The counter display is in 7 digits.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.
After canceling a jam (After picking up, the [C] key is invalid.)
When the other information is repeatedly printed, the display may show
the message, Remove original from original table. However, the
operation is performed normally.
Item

Content

22-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the system configulation.
Specifications

Option

ALL

All lists group print (Default)

SYSTEM SETTING

System setting information list

Operation/procedure

ACCOUNTING
COUNTERS

List of total number of prints

The detected machine composition is displayed.


(The job separator cannot be detected. Based on SIM 26-1 setting.)

AUDITOR NO.

Department number list

MACHINE SIM
SETTING

Machine simulation setting list

FAX SIM SETTING*1

FAX simulation setting list (Only when


the FAX board is installed. The display
does not go to the print data transfer
display, but to the FAX SIM menu.)

* When the IMC board is not installed, key input is disabled.


* Duplex print cannot be made.
* For the FAX SIM setting list, the display and the operating procedures differ.
Note: When the simulation is canceled, the display returns to the original state but the machine is not reset.

Item
SPEED
DF
OUTPUT
CASETTE1
CASETTE2
IMC MEM
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
FAX MEM
HAND SET
USB HOST

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 14

Display items
26CPM/31CPM
NONE/[1: RSPF]
NONE/[2: Finisher]/[3: Job separator]
NONE/[4: One-step paper feed unit]
NONE/[5: Two-step paper feed unit]
NONE/Expansion memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[6: PRINTER]
NONE/[7: PS3]
NONE/[8: NIC]
NONE/[9: SCANNER]
NONE/[10: FAX]
NONE/Memory capacity (MB)
NONE/[11: Handset]
NONE/USB HOST

Item
ICCARDR/W

Display items
Error code

NONE/MX-ECX2

Name

Sensor name

NONE: When it is not installed, - - - - - - - - - - is displayed.


[ ]: Shows the product code in the list below.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Item

ORG_LONG

Model code

RSPF
Finisher
Job separator
1 tray paper feed unit
2 tray paper feed unit
PRINTER
PS3
NIC
SCANNER
FAX
Handset

MX-RP10
MX-FN13
MX-TR11
MX-DE10 (*1)
MX-DE11 (*1)
MX-PB12
MX-PK10
STANDARD (Only SoftNic)
MX-NSX1
AR-FX7
AR-HN4

*1: The number of installed units is displayed beside the model code.
For the tray, only the option tray is displayed.

22-11
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
(display/print)
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
(FAX reception and print counter).
FAX
Counter

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

RSPF long size


error

Operation/procedure

SPF P-OUT
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor

Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor
Reached
Reached

22-13
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to display the CRUM type.
Specifications

Operation/Procedure
Used to display the CRUM type.
Item
00
01
02
03
04
05
99

Content
Not fixed.
AR-A
AR-B
AR-C
China
Japan
Conversion completed.

22-19

Used to display the FAX send/receive counter.


FAX SEND PAGE/TIME
FAX RECEIVE PAGE/TIME
FAX OUTPUT

FAX send page and time


FAX receive page and time
FAX output (number of print)

The counter display is in 8 digits.


Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Network scanner
Counter

Operation/procedure
Used to display the scanner counter.

22-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check


(display/print)
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
misfeed at each position.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it
can be judged as necessary for repair.)
RSPF
Trouble
Misfeed

Operation/procedure
Used to display the RSPF jam history data sequentially from the latest
one.
Forty RSPF jam histories are displayed sequentially from the latest.
Error code

Name

Sensor name

RSPF paper in lead


edge jam
RSPF paper in rear
edge jam

SPF P-IN
sensor
SPF P-IN
sensor

RDD_ND

RSPF paper out


lead edge jam

SPF P-IN
sensor

RDD_ST

RSPF paper out


rear edge jam

SPF P-OUT
sensor

JAM_REV

RSPF duplex
reverse jam

SPF P-IN
sensor

ORG_SHORT

RSPF short size


error

SPF P-IN
sensor

DFD_ND
DFD_ST

Paper Reached/
Not Reached to
the sensor

SCANMODE

Scanner mode counter

The counter display is in 7 digits.

24
24-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history,
the trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The
counters are cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Memory
Counter

Operation/procedure

Not Reached

Jam/trouble counter is cleared individually. (The history of each


counter is deleted when clearing)

Reached

1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.

Reached,
P_OUT Not
Reached
Reached, P_IN
passed (OFF)
Not Reached
(Paper after
reversing)
Passed (OFF at
JAM)

2. Press the [START] key.


The confirmation menu is shown.
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3

Item
JAM
SPF JAM
TROUBLE

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 15

Content
JAM counter/JAM history
RSPF JAM counter/RSPF JAM history
Trouble counter/Trouble history

24-5

24-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints)
of each paper feed section.
Paper feed
Counter

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Operation/procedure
Item

Used to clear each paper feed counter individually.

Data clear
Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer
counter of the DV unit which is installed is reset.)
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper
Counter
Developer

1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.

Operation/procedure

2. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.

After execution of SIM25-2, this counter is cleared.


1. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.

3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3
4
5

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4

2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)

Content
Manual feed counter
Tray 1 counter
Tray 2 counter
Tray 3 counter
Tray 4 counter

24-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

24-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the copy counter.
Counter
Copier

Operation/procedure
Data clear
Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
RSPF, and scanning.
Transport/Finisher
Counter

1. Press the [START] key.


The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)

Operation/procedure
Used to clear the original and staple counters individually.

24-7

1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.

Purpose

2. Press the [START] key.


The confirmation menu is shown.

Function
(Purpose)

3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3

Item
SPF
SCAN
STAPLE

Section
Content

Item

RSPF counter
Scan counter
Stapler counter

Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select 1: YES.

24-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
correction counter. (This simulation is executed when
the OPC drum is replaced.)
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor
Counter

Data clear
Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Counter

Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)

1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
24-9
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the printer counter and other counters.
Printer
Counter

Printer

Operation/procedure
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.
3. Select 1: YES.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1
2
3
4

Item
PRINTER
IMC
DUPLEX
OTHERS

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 16

Content
Printer counter
IMC counter
DUPLEX counter
The other counters

25-2

24-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
FAX counter data clear
FAX
Counter

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration
when replacing developer.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper

Section

Operation/procedure
1. Select a counter to be cleared with the 10 key.

Operation/procedure

2. Select 1: YES.

After execution, the developer counter is cleared.


1) Open the cover with the power OFF.

1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)

1
2
3

Item
FAX SEND
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX RECEIVE
(PAGE & TIME)
FAX OUTPUT

2) Turn on the power. (Since the cover is open, the machine does not
perform initializing.)

Content
FAX send page and time

3) Execute the simulation.


4) Enter SIM 25-2. ([25] [START] key [2] [START] key)

FAX receive page and time

5) Close the cover just before starting the simulation.


FAX output (number of prints)

6) Press the [START] key.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

The main motor rotates. After stirring for 3 min, the toner density
control sensor value is sampled 16 times, and the average value is
stored.

24-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
scanner mode.
Scanner section
Counter

When EE-EU or EE-EL after completion, an error display is shown.


Note: After completion of execution, be sure to press the [CA] key to
cancel the simulation.

Operation/procedure

26

1. Press the [START] key.


The confirmation menu is shown.

26-1

2. Select 1: YES.

Purpose

1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
The scanner mode counter and the number of send of the scanner are
cleared.
* The simulation to perform communication with the PCL is inhibited
until Notice Page storing is completed. (Only when the serviceman
call error occurs.)
* When in other than the serviceman call error, entering the simulation
is not allowed from the system check display.

Setting
Used to set whether the job separator is installed or
not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
detection, it is set in this simulation.)
Specifications
Option

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Operation/procedure
1. Select the set value with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
Set value
0
1

Connection option
None (default)
Job separator provided.

25
26-2
25-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the main drive
(excluding the scanner section) and to check the
operation of the toner concentration sensor. (The toner
concentration sensor output can be monitored.)
DRIVE
Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Press the [START] key.
The main motor rotates to start monitoring the toner density control
sensor. (3min operation)

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Setting
Used to set whether the automatic detection of paper
size is made or not.
Paper feed
Specifications

Operation/procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Used to set the automatic size detection.
2. Set whether automatic detection of paper size is made or not with
the 10-key.
1:B4/LG,FC

* Even in toner end error, if there is no other error (including cover


open) after turning on the power, this simulation can be performed.
2:A4<->LT

Setting to detect B4/Legal as FC


0: B4 legal is detected as B4 legal. (Default)
1: B4 legal is detected as FC.
This setup detects Letter as A4 in the inch series and
A4 as Letter in the AB series.
0: Detection disable (Default)
1: Detection valid

8.5 x 13 detection valid/invalid setup


Set value
0
1
AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 17

Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid

Remarks
Default

Operation/procedure

Detection size when 8.5 x 13 document/paper is used.


Employed
unit

Docu
ment

Destina
tion

Document
size

AB
series

FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)

Document
table/
RSPF
Inch
series

Paper

Manual
paper feed
tray
Inch
series

B4
B4
B4

FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)

LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
WLT
(11 x 17)

All
destina
tions
AB
series

0
(Invalid)

B4

B4
Machine
paper feed
tray

Set value

1
(Valid)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
WLT
(11 x 17)

Select the mode corresponding to the auditor specification mode with


the 10-key.
Item

Content

P10

Built-in auditor mode

VENDOR

Coin vendor mode

OTHER

Others

Setting
range

Default

0-2

When 1: VENDOR (Coin vendor mode) is set, the following three


items of system setting are changed.
1) Set the LCD backlight change inhibit to 1: OFF (Enable).
2) When SIM 26-6 destination setting is set to 0: Japan, duplex copy
inhibit setting must be set to 0: ON (Inhibit).
3) Set the sort automatic selection to 0: OFF (Disable).

Set with system setting.

FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4

LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4
LG
(8.5 x 14)
LG
(8.5 x 14)
B4

FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4
FC
(8.5 x 13)
FC
(8.5 x 13)
B4

26-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the
maintenance counter.
Specifications
Counter

Operation/procedure
Used to set the count up number (1 or 2) when an A3/WLT paper
passes through.

A4/LT (8.5 x 11) detection enable/disable setup

For the drum counter and the developer counter, double count is
employed unconditionally.

In the inch series, Letter is detected as A4; in the AB series, A4 is


detected as Letter.

(Target counter selection)

Set value
0
1

Setup
Detection invalid
Detection valid

Remarks
Default

Detection size when A4/LT (8.5 x 11) document/paper is used.


Employed
unit

Docu
ment

Paper

Document
table/
RSPF

Machine
paper feed
tray
Manual
paper feed
tray

Destina
tion
AB
series

Inch
series
All
destina
tions
All
destina
tions

LT
(8.5 x 11)

Set value
0
1
(Invalid)
(Valid)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)
LT
A4
(8.5 x 11)

Set with system setting.

Document
size
A4
LT
(8.5 x 11)
A4

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Content

TOTAL COUNTER

Total counter

MAINTENANCE COUNTER

Maintenance counter

Used to set the count up number of the selected counter.


Item

Content

SINGLE COUNT

Single count

DOUBLE COUNT

Double count

Setting range

Default

1-2

26-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set the specifications depending on the
destination.
Specifications
Destination

Operation/procedure
Select the destination with the 10-key.

Regardless of the
simulation setup.

26-3
Purpose

Item
1

Setting
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Setting must be made depending on the use condition
of the auditor.
Auditor
Specifications

By changing the destination, some other setting items may be changed.


Item
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

JAPAN
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
INEG
ABEG
INEF
ABEF
CHINESE
TAIWAN
SEEG2
TAIWAN2

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 18

Content
Japan
SEC
SECL
SEEG
SUK
SCA
SEF
EX inch series
EX AB series
EX inch series (FC)
EX AB series (FC)
China
Taiwan AB
SEEG2
Taiwan China

Setting
range

Default

0-14

26-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Setting
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
E-MAIL RIC
Specifications

Operation/procedure
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.
Enter an input (20 digits) of the E-MAIL RIC soft key with the 10-key
and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed with
OK or NG.
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the E-MAIL RIC function is
enable; if NG, the E-MAIL RIC function is disabled.
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.

26-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Item
PORTUGUESE
TURKISH
GREEK
POLISH
HUNGARIAN
CZECH
RUSSIAN
FINNISH
NORWEGIAN
DANISH
CHINESE
TAIWANESE
SLOVAK
HEBREW
BRAZILIAN
23
PORTUGUESE
24 ARABIC
25 FARSI

Remarks

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Traditional Chinese supported locally


Supported locally

Setting
Used to input the Software Key for the PS extention kit.

26-30
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Printer
Specifications

Operation/procedure

Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up control
conforming to the CE mark control.
Specifications
Operation mode (Common)

The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.

Operation/procedure

Enter an input (20 digits) of the PS expansion kit soft key with the 10key and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed
with OK or NG.

Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).

After canceling the simulation, if OK, the PS expansion kit function is


enable; if NG, the PS expansion kit function is disabled.
0
1

This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel.


Note: Executable only when the PCL/PS3 is installed.
26-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Others

OFF
ON

Purpose

Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation.


Specifications

Operation mode (Common)

Item

Content
Disable
Enable

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.

OFF
ON

Default
U.S.A, Canada, Australia, France, Taiwan

26-35
Setting

Operation/procedure

0
1

Item

Setup
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles are
displayed as one trouble or the series of troubles with
SIM 22-4 when the same troubles occur continuously.
Specifications

Operation/procedure

Setting
range

Default

0-1

Enter the set value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Item
0 ONCE
1 ANY

Content
When two or more troubles occur, only one is
registered.
All the troubles occurred are registered.

Default

26-22
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set the specification (language display) for the
destination.
Specifications

Operation/procedure
Select the display language with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).
Item
Remarks
0 JAPANESE
1 ENG.US
2 ENG.UK
3 FRENCH
4 GERMAN
5 ITALY
6 DUTCH
7 SWEDISH
8 SPANISH

26-36
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Operation

Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
0
1

Item
STOP
NON STOP

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 19

Content
Stop
Non stop

Default
1

26-37

26-57

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the developer counter life is expired.
Operation

Operation/procedure

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item
Operation/procedure

Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.

Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Item
STOP
NON STOP

0
1

Setting
Used to set the model code.
Operation

Content
Stop
Non stop

Item
AR-5726
AR-5731

1
2

Default
1

26-60
26-38

Purpose

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
when the drum counter life is expired.
Operation

Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Item
STOP
NON STOP

0
1

Content
Stop
Non stop

Setting
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key when
FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed, the FAX
mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
Operation

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.

Default

Content

Default
U.S.A, Canada,
U.K., Australia

Effective (The message with


FAX uninstalled is displayed.)
Disable (Error Beep)

Item

26-50

ON

OFF

Setting
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white reversion
function.
Operation

Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Item
ON
OFF

Content
Enable
Disable

Default
1 (U.K.)
0 (Others)

26-56
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Item

Setting
Gamma life correction setting
Operation

Operation/procedure
Sets enable/disable of the gamma life correction function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

0
1

Others

Item
AE (Japan)
AE (Ex Japan)
Text
Text/Photo
Photo (Error diffusion)
Photo (Dither)
T/S AE (Japan)
T/S AE (Ex Japan)
T/S Text
T/S Text/Photo

Set value

0: Disable
1: Enable

Default
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 20

30-2

26-71
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (pre-heat
mode setting) and the auto power shut off time can be
set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1 min, auto power
shut off: 1 min) and the long time setup (pre-heat:
5min, auto power shut off: 30min).

Operation/procedure
Select the short time setup or the long time setup of the pre-heat time
and the auto power shut off time with the 10-key, and press the
[START] key.
Item
1
2

Content
Preheat: 1min, auto power shut off: 1min
Preheat: 5min, auto power shut off: 30min

Default
1

Note: When the sub code 71 is entered to display the setting menu,the
default values are always displayed. (However,the default time is
not always set.)
26-72
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
The letterhead support is set.
When Letterhead paper setting is selected, the set
value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction setting) is
set to Setting Enable accordingly.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to display the status of the sensors attached to
the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use SIM
4-2 for the option trays.)
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation/procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
PED1
LUD1
CD1
PED2
LUD2
CD2
PFD2
DSWR2
MPED
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2

1st tray paper empty sensor


1st tray paper upper limit detection sensor
1st tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper empty sensor
2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
2nd tray empty sensor
2nd tray paper pass sensor
2nd tray right door detection sensor
Manual tray paper empty detection
Manual tray length detection 1
Manual tray length detection 2
Manual feed paper length detection 1
Manual feed paper length detection 2

Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)

Operation/procedure

A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,


8K/16K

Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.

(At detection, highlighted)

Item
0
1

Content

OFF
ON

Setting
range

Default

0-1

Letterhead paper is not set.


Letterhead paper is set.

40
40-1

30
30-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to display the sensor status attached to the
machine.
Others
Operation

Operation/procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
PPD1H
PPD1L
PPD2
POD1
DVCH
DRST
DSWR1
SFTHP
POD2
TOPF
DSWR0
LOEMP
DUP2
POD3
PTOPF

PS paper detection 1 sensor


PS paper detection 2 sensor
Fusing paper sensor
1st paper exit paper out sensor
Developing cartridge detection sensor
Drum intial detection sensor
Interlock switch (side door)
Shifter home position sensor
2nd paper exit paper out sensor
2nd paper exit full detection sensor
2nd paper exit cover open/close detection sensor
1st paper exit empty detection sensor
Reverse path paper sensor
Right paper exit sensor
Right paper exit full sensor

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual feed
tray.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation/procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
MPLS1
MPLS2
MPLD1
MPLD2

Manual tray length detection 1


Manual tray length detection 2
Manual feed paper length detection 1
Manual feed paper length detection 2

Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
8K/16K
40-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
detector detection level.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation/procedure
The adjustment method is of the 4-point system. Set the guide to Max.
(A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R position,
and Min. position for adjustment.
1) Set A3/W Letter and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
2) Set A4R/LetterR and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
3) Set to A5R/INVOICE R and fit the guide, then press the [START]
key.
4) Narrow the guide at minimum, press the [START] key.
5) Set the paper detection width (+), and press the [START] key.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 21

6) Set the paper detection width (), and press the [START] key.

41-3

If FAILED is displayed in procedure 1), 2), 3), or 4), it is NG of adjustment. Repeat the adjustment.

Purpose

Middle position adjustment L


Middle position adjustment S

Yes
No
Yes
No

Function
(Purpose)

MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
NID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF

Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the light reception level and the
detection level of the original size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation

Operation/procedure
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.

40-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
The AD conversion value of manual feed width
detection is displayed.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation/procedure
The AD conversion value of manual feed width detection is displayed.

OCSW
1 to 5

Original cover state


Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection


adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
41-4

41
41-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the document size detection photo
sensor.
Others
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.

The operation status of the sensors and detectors in the original size
detection section are displayed. The active sensors and detectors are
highlighted.

1 to 5

PD1 to 5

Others
Operation

Set the OC cover at 20 degrees detection and press the [START] key.

OCSW

OCSW

Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20 degrees.

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Original cover state


Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
Original sensor status
Without original: Normal display
With original: Highlighted display

Adjustment

Original cover state


Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection


adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
During execution, [EXECUTING] is highlighted.

For AB series, PD1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, PD1 to 4.

43
43-1

41-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size
photo sensor.
Others
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Setting
Used to set the fusing temperature.
Fixing (Fusing)
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Place an A3 (or WLT) document on the document table, and press


[START] key with the OC cover open.

1. Touch the item to be set.


2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

The adjustment is performed and the result is displayed.


OCSW
1 to 5

Item

Original cover state


Open: Highlighted display
Close: Normal display
PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)

The value in [ ] shows the threshold value. (Hexadecimal display)


For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.

During execution of the simulation, EXECUTING is displayed.


3

Ready
Temp Main
(145)
Ready
Temp Sub
(145)
Ready
Temp Main
(122)
Ready
Temp Sub
(122)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 22

Content
Ready
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Ready
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Ready
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)

Setting
range

Default
(Others) (Europe)

150 220

185

190

150 220

180

185

150 220

175

180

150 220

170

175

Item

10

11

12

13
14
15

16

17

18
19
20
21

22

23

24

WarmUp
Target Main
(145)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Target Main
(122)
WarmUp
Target Sub
(122)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(145)
WarmUp
Temp Main
(122)
WarmUp
Temp Sub
(122)
600dpi
Main (145)
600dpi Sub
(145)
POST
CARD
Main (145)
POST
CARD Sub
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(145)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(145)
600dpi
Main (122)
600dpi Sub
(122)
CARDBOA
RD Main
(122)
POST
CARD Sub
(122)
POST
CARD
(122mm/s)
CARDBOA
RD Sub
(122)

Content
Warmup target
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Warmup target
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(145mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Main
(122mm/s)
Warmup
complete
temperature Sub
(122mm/s)
600dpi Main
(145mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(145mm/s)
Postcard Main
(145mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(145mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(145mm/s)

Setting
range

Default
(Others) (Europe)

150 220

180

190

150 220

180

190

43-10
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Setting
Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when printing
postcards.
Paper feed
Operation

Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.

150 220

175

150 220

170

Setting range
Default

1-99
50

44
0 - 40

10
44-1

0 - 40

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

15

Section
0 - 40

Item

10

Setting
Used to make various setups in each mode of process
control.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation

Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
0 - 40
150 220
150 220

Item
ENVIRONMENT
1
ADJ.

15

190

195

190

195

150 220

200

150 220

200

Content
Environmental correction Allow/
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Duplex print correction Allow/
2 DUPLEX PRINT ADJ.
Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
Transfer current enviroment
ENVIROMENT ADJ
3
correction Allow/Innibit
(TC)
(0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)

Default
1
0
0

44-2

150 220

200

150 220

200

Purpose

Setting

Function
(Purpose)

Drum life correction setting

Section

Image process (Photoconductor)

Item

Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.

600dpi Main
(122mm/s)
600dpi Sub
(122mm/s)
Postcard Main
(122mm/s)
Postcard Sub
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Main
(122mm/s)
Thick paper Sub
(122mm/s)

150 220
150 220

175

185

175

185

Item
1

150 220

190

150 220

190

150 220
150 220

2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.

190

GRIDBIAS
ADJUST

Content
Drum life correction Disable/
Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)

Default

44-3
Purpose

Setting

Function
(Purpose)

Used to set the DV count correction.

Section

Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)

Item

Operation

190

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 23

Operation/procedure
Item

1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.


2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.
Item
1

PR_LIFE_ADJUST

TN_LIFE_ADJUST

RATE_ADJUST

TONER_ADJUST

Content
DV count correction Disable/
Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Life of toner control DV
correction Disable/Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Printing rate correction
Disable/Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Toner unconditionally supply
correction Disable/Enable
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)

Default
1

44-9
Purpose

Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check


(Display/Print)

Function
(Purpose)

Used to display the process control correction


information.

Section

Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)

Item

Operation

Operation/procedure
Used to display the process control correction information.
44-14
Purpose

Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check


(Display/Print)

Function
(Purpose)

Used to display the environment (temperature,


humidity) correction information.

Item

Operation

Operation/procedure

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000
465001 - 857313
857314 - 1714625
1714626 - 2571938
2571939 - 3429250
3429251 - 4286563
4286564 - 5143875
5143876 - 6001188
6001189 - 6858500
6858501 - 7715813
7715814 - 8573125
8573126 - 9430438
9430439 - 10287750
10287751 - 11145063
11145064 - 12002375
12002376 -

(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)
(26-sheet model)

Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99

Default
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45

The following data are displayed.


TH AREA

Current environment area

TMP DATA

Detection temperature of sensor (C)

HUD DATA

Detection humidity of sensor (%)

44-17
Purpose

* The value before entry of SIM is displayed. (It is not revised in real
time.)
If sim entry is just after power turned on, the display value is all 0.

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation/procedure

44-16

The following data are displayed. (The displayed value is the previous
print correction value.)

Purpose

Setting

Function
(Purpose)

Used to set the toner density control correction value.

Section

Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)

Item

Operation

TARGET
DEV REF
LIFE
TH

Toner concentration control reference value


Developer adjustment value
Toner container life correction value (SIM 44-16)
Toner container environment correction value

TARGET = DEV REF+(LIFE-50)+(TH-50)

Operation/procedure
Sets the toner density control correction value of the traveling distance
count.
Item
1
2
3
4
5

Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check


(Display/Print)
Used to display the toner density control reference
value.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation

0 - 93000
93001 - 186000
186001 - 279000
279001 - 372000
372001 - 465000

(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)
(31-sheet model)

Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99

Developer adjustment value 128, life correction 60 (developer adjustment value plus 10), environment correction 45 (5 subtraction correction), rapid toner supply correction = 128+(60-50)+(45-50) = 133.)

Default
45
45
45
45
45

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 24

44-34

Item

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
Used to set the transfer current value in each mode.

21 +V1 LABEL (145)


22 +V2 LABEL (145)

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be set.

23

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.


To support an individual necessity in paper and the environment, it is
variable in the range of 5 to 30uA in the increment of 1uA in each mode.
When changing +V2, check with +V1 unchanged. If there is any trouble
in the half tone image of graphics, keep the relationship between +V1
and +V2 at the default and change it.
When the image quality is deteriorated because the user selects the
OHP mode and use other than the recommended OHP, decrease the
transfer current to adjust deterioration of black background picture quality. If some of characters are not printed, increase the transfer current.

24
25
26
27
28
29
30

This setting is changed in linkage with SIM 26-6 destination setting.

31

*1: SECL/SCA/SEF/EX inch series/EX AB series/EX inch series (FC)/


EX AB series (FC)/China/Taiwan/SEEG2

32

*2: SEC/SEEG/SUK
Item
1 +V1F (145)
2 +V1R (145)
3 +V2F (145)
4 +V2R (145)
5 +V1S-F (145)
6 +V1S-R (145)
7 +V2S-F (145)
8 +V2S-R (145)
9 +V1SS-F (145)
10 +V1SS-R (145)
11 +V1SS-F (145)
12 +V1SS-R (145)
13 +V1 THICK (145)
14 +V2 THICK (145)
+V1 THICK S
(145)
+V2 THICK S
16
(145)

15

17 +V1 THIN (145)


18 +V2 THIN (145)
19 +V1 THIN S (145)
20 +V2 THIN S (145)

Content
145mm/s normal paper W
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper W
+V1 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper W
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper W
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N1
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper N1
+V1 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N1
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper N1
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N2
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper N2
+V1 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s normal paper N2
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
145mm/s normal paper N2
+V2 Duplex (Back)
145mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V1
145mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V2
145mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V1
145mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V2
145mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V1
145mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V2
145mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V1
145mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V2

Setting Default
range *1 *2

+V1 LABEL S
(145)
+V2 LABEL S
(145)
+V1 OHP (145)
+V2 OHP(145)
+V1 OHP S (145)
+V2 OHP S (145)
+V1 POSTCARD
(145)
+V2 POSTCARD
(145)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (145)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (145)

33 +V1F (122)

5-30

34 +V1R (122)

5-30

35 +V2F (122)

5-30

18 20

36 +V2R (122)

5-30

14 18

37 +V1S-F (122)

5-30

38 +V1S-R (122)

5-30

39 +V2S-F (122)

5-30

18

40 +V2S-R (122)

5-30

18

5-30

5-30

5-30

18

5-30

18

5-30

5-30

14

5-30

5-30

14

5-30

5-30

18

5-30

5-30

18

41 +V1SS-F (122)
42 +V1SS-R (122)
43 +V2SS-F (122)
44 +V2SS-R (122)
45 +V1 THICK (122)
46 +V2 THICK (122)
+V1 THICK S
(122)
+V2 THICK S
48
(122)

47

49 +V1 THIN (122)


50 +V2 THIN (122)
51 +V1 THIN S (122)
52 +V2 THIN S (122)
53 +V1 LABEL (122)
54 +V2 LABEL (122)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 25

Content
145mm/s label paper > LTR
+V1
145mm/s label paper > LTR
+V2
145mm/s label paper t LTR
+V1
145mm/s label paper t LTR
+V2
145mm/s OHP > LTR +V1
145mm/s OHP > LTR +V2
145mm/s OHP t LTR +V1
145mm/s OHP t LTR +V2
145mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V1
145mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V2
145mm/s postcard/envelope
t 100mm +V1
145mm/s postcard/envelope
t 100mm +V2
122mm/s normal paper W
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s normal paper W
+V1 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper W
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s normal paper W
+V2 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper N1
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s normal paper N1
+V1 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper N1
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s normal paper N1
+V2 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper N2
+V2 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper N2
+V1 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s normal paper N2
+V1 Duplex (Back)
122mm/s normal paper N2
+V2 single surface. Duplex
(Front)
122mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V1
122mm/s thick paper > LTR
+V2
122mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V1
122mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V2
122mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V1
122mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V2
122mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V1
122mm/s thin paper t LTR
+V2
122mm/s label paper > LTR
+V1
122mm/s label paper > LTR
+V2

Setting Default
range *1 *2
5-30

5-30

18

5-30

5-30

14

5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30

5
14
5
18

5-30

5-30

26

5-30

5-30

26

5-30

5-30

5-30

12 14

5-30

12

5-30

5-30

5-30

14

5-30

14

5-30

5-30

5-30

14

5-30

14

5-30

5-30

10

5-30

5-30

12

5-30

5-30

12

5-30

5-30

12

5-30

5-30

12

Item
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Setting Default
range *1 *2

Content

+V1 LABEL S
(122)
+V2 LABEL S
(122)
+V1 OHP (122)
+V2 OHP (122)
+V1 OHP S (122)
+V2 OHP S (122)
+V1 POSTCARD
(122)
+V2 POSTCARD
(122)
+V1 POSTCARD
S (122)
+V2 POSTCARD
S (122)

122mm/s label paper t LTR


+V1
122mm/s label paper t LTR
+V2
122mm/s OHP > LTR +V1
122mm/s OHP > LTR +V2
122mm/s OHP t LTR +V1
122mm/s OHP t LTR +V2
122mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V1
122mm/s postcard/envelope
> 100mm +V2
122mm/s postcard/envelope
t 100mm +V1
122mm/s postcard/envelope
t 100mm +V2

46-9
Purpose

Adjustment
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text).
Picture quality
Density

5-30

5-30

12

5-30
5-30
5-30
5-30

5
8
5
12

5-30

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.

5-30

16

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.

5-30

5-30

16

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

Function
(Purpose)
Item

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

(Exposure mode (Text))


Item

44-40
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
Used to set the time from the start of the main motor
rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply in previous
rotation after turning on the power.

Operation/procedure
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Set the toner supply previous rotation time.
Setting range
Default

1-99 (sec)
4 (sec)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

46

14
46-2

15

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure mode.
Picture quality

17

Density

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. (Automatic adjustment)
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.

(Exposure mode)

AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)
TEXT/PHOTO(TS)

19

1.0 (SHIFT)
1.0 (GAMMA)
2.0 (SHIFT)
2.0 (GAMMA)
3.0 (SHIFT)
3.0 (GAMMA)
4.0 (SHIFT)
4.0 (GAMMA)
5.0 (SHIFT)
5.0 (GAMMA)
TS 1.0
(SHIFT)
1TS 1.0
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
(SHIFT)
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)

Character level 1.0 (shift qty)


Character level 1.0 (slant)
Character level 2.0 (shift qty)
Character level 2.0 (slant)
Character level 3.0 (shift qty)
Character level 3.0 (slant)
Character level 4.0 (shift qty)
Character level 4.0 (slant)
Character level 5.0 (shift qty)
Character level 5.0 (slant)
Character (TS) level 1.0
(shift qty)
Character (TS) level 1.0
(slant)
Character (TS) level 2.0
(shift qty)
Character (TS) level 2.0
(slant)
Character (TS) level 3.0
(shift qty)
Character (TS) level 3.0
(slant)
Character (TS) level 4.0
(shift qty)
Character (TS) level 4.0
(slant)
Character (TS) level 5.0
(shift qty)
Character (TS) level 5.0
(slant)

Setting
range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99

Default
22
44
36
47
50
50
61
55
72
60

1-99

22

1-99

44

1-99

36

1-99

47

1-99

50

1-99

50

1-99

61

1-99

55

1-99

72

1-99

60

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

18

20

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.

Item

16

Content

46-10
Setting
Default
range

Content
AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE (TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo (TS)

Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

1-99

50

Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Text/Photo).
Picture quality

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

Level 3.0
Level 3.0

* Except for AE and AE (TS), only Level 3 can be set.


Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 26

(Exposure mode (Text/Photo))


Item

Content

1 1.0 (SHIFT)
2 1.0 (GAMMA)
3 2.0 (SHIFT)
4 2.0 (GAMMA)
5 3.0 (SHIFT)
6 3.0 (GAMMA)
7 4.0 (SHIFT)
8 4.0 (GAMMA)
9 5.0 (SHIFT)
10 5.0 (GAMMA)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

(Exposure mode (Photo))

TS 1.0
(SHIFT)
TS 1.0
(GAMMA)
TS 2.0
(SHIFT)
TS 2.0
(GAMMA)
TS 3.0
(SHIFT)
TS 3.0
(GAMMA)
TS 4.0
(SHIFT)
TS 4.0
(GAMMA)
TS 5.0
(SHIFT)
TS 5.0
(GAMMA)

Character/Photo level 1.0


(shift qty)
Character/Photo level 1.0
(slant)
Character/Photo level 2.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo level 2.0
(slant)
Character/Photo level 3.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo level 3.0
(slant)
Character/Photo level 4.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo level 4.0
(slant)
Character/Photo level 5.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo level 5.0
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 1.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo (TS) level 1.0
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 2.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo (TS) level 2.0
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 3.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo (TS) level 3.0
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 4.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo (TS) level 4.0
(slant)
Character/Photo (TS) level 5.0
(shift qty)
Character/Photo (TS) level 5.0
(slant)

Setting
Default
range

Item

1.0(SHIFT)
1.0(GAMMA)
2.0(SHIFT)
2.0(GAMMA)
3.0(SHIFT)
3.0(GAMMA)
4.0(SHIFT)
4.0(GAMMA)
5.0(SHIFT)
5.0(GAMMA)

Setting
range

Default

1-99

16
50
33
50
50
50
56
61
62
66

Photo level 1.0 (shift qty)


Photo level 1.0 (slant)
Photo level 2.0 (shift qty)
Photo level 2.0 (slant)
Photo level 3.0 (shift qty)
Photo level 3.0 (slant)
Photo level 4.0 (shift qty)
Photo level 4.0 (slant)
Photo level 5.0 (shift qty)
Photo level 5.0 (slant)

30

1-99

37

1-99

40

1-99

43

1-99

50

1-99

50

1-99

57

1-99

61

1-99

64

1-99

66

1-99

30

1-99

37

1-99

40

2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and
press the [#/P] key.

1-99

43

3. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started and the set value is stored.

1-99

50

1-99

50

1-99

57

1-99

61

1-99

64

1-99

66

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.
46-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
FAX exposure level adjustment
(1 mode automatic adjustment)
FAX
Image quality

Operation/procedure
1. Select 1: COPY START.
The currently set value is displayed beside the item.

Normal display

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

Error display

There is no tray selection operation.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Item
Setting range
Default
1 COPY START

2 FAX EXP.LEVEL
0-99
50
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
46-13

46-11

Function
(Purpose)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Content

1-99

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.

Purpose

Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Photo).
Picture quality
Density

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Normal mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality

Operation/procedure
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
1. Select an item to be adjusted.

Operation/procedure

2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

3. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Normal display

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.

Error display

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

There is no tray selection operation.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
1
2
3
4

Item
COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE
MANUAL

Content
Setting range
Copy start

Exposure level selection


Normal text AE
0-99
Normal text MANUAL

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.


AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 27

Default

50

46-16

46-14
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Fine text mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

1. Select 1: COPY START.


The currently set value is displayed beside the item.

The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.

2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and
press the [#/P] key.

2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.

1. Select an item to be adjusted.

3. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Normal display

Normal display

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

Error display

Error display

The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.


Item

5
6

Setting
Default
range

Content

COPY START
EXP.LEVEL
AE (PHOTO ON)
AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

There is no tray selection operation.

There is no tray selection operation.

1
2
3
4

3. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started and the set value is stored.

Copy start
Exposure level selection
Fine text AE (Half tone)
Fine text AE
Fine text MANUAL
(Half tone)

0-99

50

Fine text MANUAL

The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.


Setting
Item
Content
range
1 COPY START
Copy start

2 EXP.LEVEL
Exposure level selection
3 AE (PHOTO ON)
Ultra Fine AE (Half tone)
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Ultra Fine AE
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
0-99
5
(PHOTO ON)
(Half tone)
MANUAL
Ultra Fine MANUAL
6
(PHOTO OFF)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

46-15

46-18

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
FAX exposure level adjustment
(Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
FAX
Image quality

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

1. Select an item to be adjusted.

Adjustment
Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
Picture quality

2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.

3. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started and the set value is stored.

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Set the exposure level with the 10-key.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

(Auto adjustment)
Item

There is no tray selection operation.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Item

Content

1
2

COPY START
EXP.LEVEL

AE (PHOTO ON)

AE (PHOTO OFF)
MANUAL
(PHOTO ON)
MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)

Copy start
Exposure level selection
Super Fine AE
(Half tone)
Super Fine AE
Super Fine MANUAL
(Half tone)

5
6

50

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The adjustment item and the current set value are highlighted.

The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.

Error display

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Normal display

Default

Setting
range

0-99

Default

50

AE
Character
Character/Photo
Photo
AE(TS)
Character (TS)
Character/Photo
7 TEXT/PHOTO(TS)
(TS)
1
2
3
4
5
6

AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO
AE(TS)
TEXT(TS)

Setting
Default
range

Content
Level 3.0
Level 3.0
Level 3.0

1-99

50

Level 3.0
Level 3.0

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
menu but the machine is not reset.

Super Fine MANUAL

Note:Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 28

46-31

46-19
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment
Used to set the control method of the exposure mode.
Picture quality

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the adjustment value entry menu.
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to
the original state (adjustment item selection menu).

4
5

PHOTO MODE

Content
Auto exposure mode*
(1: Priority on Image quality,
2: Priority on toner consumption)
Auto exposure STOP mode
(COPY)
(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time)

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Item
AE
TEXT
TEXT/PHOTO
PHOTO

1
2
3
4

Setting range

Default

0-2

Default

Auto exposure STOP mode (FAX)


(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time)
Auto exposure STOP mode
(SCANNER)
(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time)
Photo mode
(1: ED (Error diffusion) , 2: DT (Dither))

46-39

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.

Enter the set value with the 10-key.


0

Item
0

HAIRLINE

PRINTER

Content
Original with pencil lines
and thin lines
Printed original

Setting range

Default

0-1

* Auto exposure mode


When SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) is changed from EX Japan to
Japan, the setup value becomes 1 (Default: Japan). If, on the contrary, it is changed from Japan to EX Japan, the set value becomes
2 (Default: EX Japan)
If the auto exposure mode setup value is changed, the setup value
of SIM 46-30 (AE limit setup) is reset to the default value.
46-20
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Setting
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Item
AE MODE
(1:EXPOSURE
2:TONER)
AE STOP(COPY)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE MODE(FAX)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)
AE STOP(SCAN)
(0:FIXED
1:REAL TIME)

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment
Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
RSPF for OC exposure.
Picture quality

48
48-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be set.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

Operation/procedure

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

1
2

Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE

Content
SPF
RSPF

Setting range

Default

1-99

53

Item
1

F-R

SCAN

SPF (SIDE1)

Operation/procedure

SPF (SIDE2)

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

DUPLEX

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

MirSpeed

46-30
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Setting
Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
(Toner save).

If SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) and SIM46-19 (Auto exposure mode)


are changed, this setup is also changed to the default value accordingly.
1
2

Item
AE
AE(TS)

Setting range

Default

0-31

Content
Main scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio
DUPLEX sub scanning
magnification ratio adjustment
Mirror speed adjustment

Setting
range

Default
50
60

1-99
50

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 29

There is no operation of tray selection.

48-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification ratio
(main/sub scanning direction).
Image processing
Picture quality

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be set.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
adjustment value with the 10-key.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
Content

Setting
range

Default

Main scanning magnification


ratio adjustment
Sub scanning magnification
ratio adjustment
RSPF surface sub scan
magnification ratio
RSPF back surface sub scan
magnification ratio

1-99

50

Item
1

F-R

SCAN

SPF (SIDE1)

SPF (SIDE2)

The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.


Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Setting
Item
Content
Default
range
1 COPY START
Copy start

SCAN SELECT
Scan selection
2
1-255*
128
(OC/SPF/RSPF)
(OC/ SPF/RSPF)
SCAN Main scanning
3 OC(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Sub scanning
4 OC(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (OC)
SCAN Main scanning
5 SPF(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
6 SPF(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (SPF)
SCAN Main scanning
7 RSPF(MAIN)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (RSPF)
SCAN Sub scanning
8 RSPF(SUB)
magnification ratio
1-255*
128
adjustment (RSPF)
* The adjustment can be made in the range of 12.7% - +12.7% by
the increment of 0.1%.

48-3
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Adjustment
Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
correction.
Image processing
Picture quality

48-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section

Operation/procedure

Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (print)
FAX

1. The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.

Operation/procedure

2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.

Changes magnification ratio by changing speed of main motor.

1. Select an item to be adjusted.

The change of the paper transfer speed is 0.1% when changing value
is 1.

2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio correction with the 10
key.

1
2

Item

Content

Setting
range

Default

145mm/s
122mm/s

Main motor speed (145mm/s)


Main motor speed (122mm/s)

45-55

50

Normal display
Error display

The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.

Adjustment
FAX magnification adjustment (read)
FAX

Operation/procedure
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
1. Select an item to be adjusted.
2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio adjustment with the
10 key.
3. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Normal display
Error display

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

There is no operation of tray selection.

48-8
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

3. Press the [START] key.

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

When two pages are scanned, duplex printing is made.


Setting
Default
Item
Content
range
1 COPY START Copy start
1-255
128
Print magnification ratio
2 Horizontal
adjustment (Horizontal, vertical 1-255
128
to paper passing)
Print magnification ratio
3 Vertical
adjustment (Vertical, parallel to 1-255
128
paper passing)
Print magnification ratio
Horizontal
adjustment on the back surface
4
1-255
128
(DUPLEX)
(Horizontal, vertical to paper
passing)
Print magnification ratio
adjustment on the back surface
Vertical
1-255
128
5
(Vertical, parallel to paper
(DUPLEX)
passing)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 30

50

Item

Left edge void adjustment


(First print surface)
Left edge void adjustment
9 SIDE VOID-DUP
(Duplex)
Image loss amount
10 LOSS(OC)
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
8

50-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
Picture quality

Content

Image position

SIDE VOID

Setting
Default
range
1-99

18

1-99

18

1-5

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

50-5

2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
(Adjustment procedure)

2. Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no void.)


3. Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC document table.
4. Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 - 99: About
0.127mm/Step)
5. Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the
original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
paper. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
6. Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
7. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
8. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
9. Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
10. If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 - 5: About 0.677mm)
* If there is no problem, set to 2.

2
3
4
5
6
7

2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)

1. Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
change the value to 99.

Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
the print paper in the print mode.
Picture quality
Print area

Operation/procedure

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.

Item

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Content

Original scan start position


adjustment
RRC-A
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A
adjustment (Main tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A-MANUAL adjustment (Manual feed
tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A -OPTION
adjustment (Option tray)
Lead edge cancel
DEN-A -DUPLEX adjustment (back of the
machine)
DEN-B
Rear edge void adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
DEN-B-DUP
(Duplex)

Setting
Default
range
1-99

43

3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.


Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
Item
Content
Setting range Default
1 TRAY1
1st tray
0-99
2 OPTION
Option tray
53
3 MANUAL
Manual feed
1-99
4 DUPLEX
Back print

50-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
Picture quality
Image position

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

1-99

18

1-99

18

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
Item

1-99

18

1-99

18

1-99

30

1-99

50

1 SIDE1
2 SIDE2
3 END EDGE
4 LOSS(SIDE1)
5 LOSS(SIDE2)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 31

Content
Surface original scan start
position adjustment
Back original scan start
position set
Rear edge void adjustment
(RSPF)
Surface image loss quantity
set
Back image loss quantity set

Setting
range

Default

1-99

50

1-99

50

1-99

50

1-5

1-5

Item

Content

Surface rear edge image


6 REARLOS(SIDE1)
loss quantity set
Back rear edge image loss
7 REARLOS(SIDE2)
quantity set

Setting
range

Default

1-5

1-5

3. Press the [START] key.


Normal display
Error display

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

There is no tray selection operation.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
50-8

When two pages are scanned, duplex print is made,

The adjustments on the machine side must have been normally


completed.
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
FAX

1 COPY START

Setting
Default
range

43-57

53

43-57

53

43-57

53

43-57

53

43-57

53

43-57

53

Item

The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.


1. Select an item to be adjusted.

2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key.
3. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
Normal display

NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN
JAM
PAPER EMPTY

Error display

There is no tray selection operation.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.

4. Select the scanning method.


Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Item
1 COPY START
SCAN
2 SELECT (OC/
SPF/RSPF)
3 LEAD

4 LEFT

5 REAR

6 RIGHT

Content
Copy start

Setting
range

Scan selection (1: OC,


2: SPF, 3: RSPF back)
Scan lead edge position
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.
Scan left edge position
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.
Scan rear edge position
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.
Scan right edge position
adjustment value of the
selected method in 2.

Copy start
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(Front surface)
Print lead edge void
LEAD
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)
Print left edge void
LEFT (DUPLEX) adjustment value
(Back surface)
Print rear edge void
REAR
adjustment value
(DUPLEX)
(Back surface)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Default

50-10
Purpose

1-3

43-57

50

43-57

50

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
section.)
Image processing (ICU)
Picture quality
Image position

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

43-57

50

43-57

50

2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.

50-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section

Content

Adjustment
FAX lead edge adjustment (print)
FAX

Operation/procedure
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
1. Select an item to be adjusted.
2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key.

Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 32

Content
Manual paper feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print

Setting range

Default

1-99

50

50-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the print image center position.
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Image processing
Picture quality
Image position

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
state and print is started.

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Item
BYPASS
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
DUPLEX
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)

Content
Manual feed
1st tray
2nd tray
3rd tray
4th tray
Back print
RSPF front surface
RSPF back surface

Setting range
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99
1-99

Default
50
50
50
50
50
70
50
50

(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)


3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.

51-8

4. Press the [START] key.


Copying is started.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the initial menu, but the machine is not reset.
1

Item
OC

SPF(SIDE1)

SPF(SIDE2)

Content
OC document scan
RSPF document front
surface scan
RSPF document back
surface scan

Setting range

Default

1-99

50

Item

Item

Select the set value with the 10-key.


0
1

Adjustment
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Function
(Purpose)

Section
Item

Default

0-1

Setting
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage ON/
OFF timing.
Process (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Operation

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

Item

Setting range

Default

1-99

50

SHV ON

SHV OFF

51-2
Purpose

Setting range

Operation/Procedure

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
Item
145mm/s
122mm/s

Content
Enable
Disable

2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.

Operation/procedure

1
2

Item
ON
OFF

51-9

51-1

Section

Section

Setting
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl operation
inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Image process
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation

Operation/procedure

51
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the
resist roller in each section (copier paper feed section,
duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper feed section).
(When the print image position varies greatly for the
paper or when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the
adjustment is required.)
Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 33

Content
Separation voltage ON timing
* Transfer V2ON reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)
Separation voltage OFF timing
* Transfer V2OFF reference
(Synchronized with the
adjustment value of 50.)

Setting
range

Default

25-90

50

50-90

75

53-9

53

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

53-6
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF width.
The adjustment method is the 4-point system. Set the
guide to Max. (A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R
position, A5R/Invoice R position, and Min. position for
adjustment.
RSPF

Press [START] key.


Item
Read position adjustment

53-10

(Max. position setting)

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

2. Set A4R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.

RSPF read position adjustment

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure
1. Set the guide to the maximum position, and press the [START] key.

Adjustment

Setting range
1-99

Adjustment
RSPF exp adjustment

3. Set A5R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key.

Operation/Procedure

4. Set the guide to the minimum position, and press the [START] key.

1. Press [START] key.

5. Set the paper recognition width (+), and press the [START] key.

2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

6. Set the paper recognition width (),and press the [START] key.
If FAILED is displayed in the above procedure 1, 2, 3, or 4, repeat the
adjustment.

1
2

Default
50

Item
SPF EXPOSURE
RSPF EXPOSURE

Setting range

Default

1-99

53

(Middle position L/S setting)


Middle position
adjustment L
Middle position
adjustment S

YES
NO
YES
NO

MID-L ADJ.ON
MID-L ADJ.OFF
MID-S ADJ.ON
MID-S ADJ.OFF

55
55-1

53-7
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
Used to enter the RSPF width detection adjustment
value.
RSPF

Purpose

Setting

Function
(Purpose)

Used to set the soft switch.

Section

Operation

Operation/Procedure

Operation/Procedure

1. Touch the item to be adjusted.


The item and the currently set value are highlighted.

Used to enter the number of SW to be changed.

2. Enter the RSPF original tray size adjustment value (specified on


the back of the RSPF) with the 10-key.
Item
Content
Setting range Default
1 MAX POSITION Max. width
2 POSITION 1
Adjustment point 1
0-999
0
3 POSITION 2
Adjustment point 2
4 MIN POSITION Min. width

The bit to be changed is specified by 10-key. (The current value is


highlighted.)
When [START] key is pressed, the entered value is set.

61
61-1
Purpose

53-8
Purpose

Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the mirror
unit automatically. For the RSPF scan position
automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is shifted to
11mm before the RSPF glass cover edge, and is
operated automatically to scan images by the unit of 1
step, detecting the position up to the glass cover
automatically.

Operation/Procedure
With the RSPF or the OC cover open, put a white paper on the OC
glass (the RSPF glass surface is included for the RSPF standard
model), and press the [START] key.

Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
LSU
Operation

Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key, and the LSU test is performed.
Used to set the LSU to ON state and check that the sync signal
(HSYNC/) is outputted or not.
After operation for 30 sec, the result is displayed. (Interruption cannot
be made for 5 sec after starting the operation.)

If the adjustment is executed normally, the adjustment value is displayed and saved in the EEPROM. If an error occurs, ERR is displayed and the value is not saved in the EEPROM.
If the adjustment is not performed because of abnormality, --- is displayed.
During execution of the adjustment, the operation cannot be interrupted.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 34

63

65

63-1
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

65-1
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
(display/print)
Used to check the result of shading correction.
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Scanner (Exposure)
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position.
Operation (Display, Operation)

Operation/Procedure
Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.

Operation/procedure
Pressing the [START] key performs shading, and displays the result
(center pixel).

Adjust the touch panel coordinates.


When the point of + on the LCD is pressed, it turns gray. Press all the
four points of +.

63-7
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start pixel
position automatically.
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Scanner
Operation

65-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check


(Display, Print)
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section)
detection position adjustment result.
Operation (Display, Operation)

Operation/Procedure

Operation/procedure
Lift the RSPF unit to the fully open position, and press the [START] key.
[ ] indicates the order number of the pixel of the white sheet for RSPF
exposure correction in the RSPF position.
If the adjustment is normally completed, COMPLETE is displayed
and data are written into the EEPROM.
In case of an abnormality, ERROR is displayed and no data is written
into the EEPROM.
The RSPF white correction start pixel = Displayed pixel position 34
If the simulation is executed with the RSPF unit closed, an error will
result.

Check the touch panel coordinates.


Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
When the touch panel is pressed, the X-coordinate and the Y-coordinate (dot conversion values) are displayed.

65-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check


(Display, Print)
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
Operation (screen/operation)

64

Operation/procedure

64-1

Check the key input of the operation panel.


Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the printer function
(auto print operation).
Printer
Operation

After completion of all key entries, COMPLETE is displayed.

66

Operation/procedure

66-1

1. Select the print item with the 10-key.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

2. Press the [START] key.


The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

Setting
Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
FAX

Operation/procedure

During execution of the print test, the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and
the [INTERRUPTION] key are invalid.
Setting
Item
Content
Default
range
Self print is made in 2 by 4 mode
(printing 2 lines and not printing
4 lines). Since scanning is not
2 BY 4
1
performed, when the original is
MODE
set on the RSPF, this cannot be
1-2
1
performed.
* Duplex print cannot be made.
Lattice print (1cm, 1dot width
WLT, A3 print (A3 main scan,
LATTICE
2
WLT sub scan)) is performed.
PRINT
* Duplex print can be made.

1. Enter the soft SW number to be selected with the 10-key.


2. Check and change the setting content of the selected soft SW.
3. Press the [START] key to save the set content.
The FAX-related soft SW is displayed on the LCD, and changing can
be made by monitoring it.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

* If the IMC board is not installed, the key inputs cannot be made.
AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 35

2. Detailed procedure

66-2
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section

Adjustment
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
FAX

55H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the


address data are read in sequence to check that they were
properly written.
AAH is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
address data are read in sequence to check that they were
properly written.
00H is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
address data are read in sequence to check that they were
properly written.
Perform checks 1 - 3 sequentially. If there is no abnormality, it is
OK. If there is any abnormality, NG is notified to the error
address.
The check result is saved. New result is overwrited with each
check.

Operation/procedure
1. Enter the country code with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.

2. When 1: (YES) is selected, the soft SW corresponding to the


country code is cleared. When 2: (NO) is selected, the simulation
is canceled.

Country code
Japan

: 00000000

U.S.A.

: 10110101

Australia

: 00001001

Interruption cannot be made during operation.

U.K.

: 10110100

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

France

: 00111101

Germany

: 00000100

Sweden

: 10100101

66-4
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

New Zealand : 01111110


China

: 00100110

Singapore

: 10011100

Taiwan

: 11111110

Operation test/check
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
FAX
Operation

India

: 01010011

Operation/procedure

Malaysia

: 01101100

Hong Kong

: 01010000

Middle east

: 11111101

Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The signal is sent to the line and the machine speaker. (Sending the
signal is continued until the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.)

SouthAfrica

: 10011111

Spain

: 10100000

Portugal

: 10001011

Russia

: 10111000

Denmark

: 00110001

Norway

: 10000010

Switzerland

: 10100110

Italy

: 01011001

Belgium

: 00001111

By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.

Luxembourg : 01101001
Netherlands : 01111011
Finland

: 00111100

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

66-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
FAX PWB memory check
FAX
Operation

Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key.
Read/write can be checked for FAX PWB memory.
The check result is displayed separately for each memory.
1. Memory to be checked
DRAM
SRAM
Flash ROM
Option memory
PAGE

Program area

SUM check only

Memory area
The memory size follows the
automatically detected value.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Item
NO SIGNAL
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
0.3 FLG
CED2100
CNG1100
0.3 V21
ANSam

31 RINGER

MODEM

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 36

Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal

Tone signal

Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)

Item
32 No MSG

33 No RBT

34 DP MAKE

35 DP BRK

Send signal
Voice message (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

32 No MSG

33 No RBT

34 DP MAKE

35 DP BRK

Send signal
Voice message (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make)
Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Dial pulse (break)
Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

66-5
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Signal number

66-6
Operation test/check
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
FAX
Operation

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Data output, check


Printing the confidential password
FAX
Data
Confidential/Pass code

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.

Press the [START] key.

By setting the signal number, signals are sent to the line and the
machine speaker. (Sending signals is continued until interruption command is made (by pressing [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)

The confidential ID table (confidential BOX numbers, confidential BOX


names, and confidential password) is printed.

By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Signal number
1 NO SIGNAL
2 33.6 V34
3 31.2 V34
4 28.8 V34
5 26.4 V34
6 24.0 V34
7 21.6 V34
8 19.2 V34
9 16.8 V34
10 14.4 V34
11 12.0 V34
12 9.6 V34
13 7.2 V34
14 4.8 V34
15 2.4 V34
16 14.4 V33
17 12.0 V33
18 14.4 V17
19 12.0 V17
20 9.6 V17
21 7.2 V17
22 9.6 V29
23 7.2 V29
24 4.8 V27t
25 2.4 V27t
26 0.3 FLG
27 CED2100
28 CNG1100
29 0.3 V21
30 ANSam
31 RINGER

Send signal
Signal not sent
33.6 V34
31.2 V34
28.8 V34
26.4 V34
24.0 V34
21.6 V34
19.2 V34
16.8 V34
14.4 V34
12.0 V34
9.6 V34
7.2 V34
4.8 V34
2.4 V34
14.4 V33
12.0 V33
14.4 V17
12.0 V17
9.6 V17
7.2 V17
9.6 V29
7.2 V29
4.8 V27t
2.4 V27t
7EH Flag signal

The confidential data of My company mode is printed separately.

66-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Data output, check


Print the screen memory contents
FAX
Data
Image data

Operation/procedure
Press the [START] key.
Used to input all image data (including confidential reception data,
remote send image, not-sent image) stored in image memory of the
FAX section.
The output image is remained even after outputting.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
66-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Adjustment/Setting/Check
Image data memory clear
FAX
Data
Image data

Operation/procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. (When 2:
NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Used to clear all image data (including confidential reception data)
stored in image memory of the FAX section.
The management table is also cleared (initialized) at the same time.
* lIf there is any print data, the power must be turned off after clearing.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Tone signal

Pseudo-ringer sound
([ON HOOK] key ON)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 37

66-14

66-11
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Max.)
FAX
Operation

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation check/test
Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
FAX
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/Procedure

Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.

1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.

By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the


line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)

2. Set the make time with the 10-key.


The dial is sent with the set value + 26ms.
The sending dial cannot be interrupted.

The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.

0
1

Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME

Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting

By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Operation/Procedure

Setting range

0-15

66-15
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation check/test
Used to perform the dial test. (20 PPS send test)
FAX
Operation

1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
66-12
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

2. Set the make time with the 10-key.


Operation test/check
Used to send 300bps signals.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
FAX
Operation

The dial is sent with the set value + 9ms.


The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
0
1

Operation/procedure

Item
EXECUTE
MAKE TIME

Content
Execution
Dial pulse make time setting

Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the


line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.)

66-16

The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value.
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before execution of the mode after completion of the mode.
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Item
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111
3 11110
4 00000
5 010101
6 00001
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
66-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Setting range

0-15

Operation check/test
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
FAX
Operation

Operation/Procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
Item
0
1
2

Content

EXECUTE
HIGH (SW)
HIGH-LOW (SW)

Execution
High group
High group, Low group

Setting
range

0-15
0-15

3. Select the soft SW reflection.


Setting
Used to register the dial numbers.
FAX
Operation

1
2

Item
NO STORE TO SW
STORE TO SW

Content
Not reflected.
Reflected. (Shift SW value changed.)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Operation/procedure
Enter the number with the 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key.
Press the [CLEAR] key to return to the initial state.
Press the [START] key to register the entered number.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 38

66-21

66-17
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation check/test
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Max.)
FAX
Operation

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Check
FAX information print
FAX
Data

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

1. Select the item to be printed.

Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.

2. Press the [START] key.

When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the


simulation is terminated.

The information of the selected item is printed.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

1
2

Item
USER SW.LIST
SOFT SW.LIST

SYSTEM ERROR

PROTOCOL

PARTIAL SRAM
CLEAR

66-18
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation check/test
Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
FAX
Operation

Operation/Procedure
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the
simulation is terminated.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Back up
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.

66-22

FAX
Data

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The data
are backed up. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.

Setting
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
FAX
Operation

Operation/procedure
1. Select the sound volume to be set.
(MAX: Large, MIDDLE: Medium, MIN: Small)
2. Press [START] key.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made even during execution of the simulation.

66-20
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Clear the FSS area in the SRAM.

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

66-19
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Content
User setting list
Soft SW list
System error list
Used to print the system error log (error
number and time).
Protocol error list
Regardless of soft SW38-1 status, the
protocol monitor of the preceding
communication is printed. (Printing is
allowed at any time before starting the
next communication.) For this operation,
the protocol monitor of one
communication is always buffered.

A sound is generated during execution of the simulation.


Back up

Note: Execution is possible only when FAX is installed.

Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.


FAX
Data

66-24

Operation/Procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The Flash
ROM data are read out and written into the SRAM. (When 2: NO is
selected, the simulation is canceled.)
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is executed, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Purpose
Function
(Purpose)
Section
Item

Data clear
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
FAX
Data

Initializing

Operation/procedure
Select 1: YES with the 10-key and press the [START] key. The FAST
storage data are cleared. (When 2: NO is selected, the simulation is
canceled.)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 39

66-34

66-30
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
FAX
Operation

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Communication time measurement display
FAX
Operation

Operation/procedure

Operation/procedure

When the relay state of the polarity reverse relay, the handset hook
switch, or the external telephone hook switch is changed, the content
of change is displayed regardless of the soft SW setup (real time). The
display of change is kept until an interruption command is supplied by
pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.

The send/receive test is performed, and the time required for send/
receive of the image data in the test is measured and displayed.

Item
HS2
HS1
RHS
EXHS

Notification contents
Signal low
Signal high
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

Setup on the user


side when executing
communication

Measuring
range

Send
Receive

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.


Mode when measuring
66-31
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

How to check the time

Setting
Used to set the TEL/LIU.
FAX
Operation

Measuring unit

Communication
: Memory send
means
: Normal Character
Picture quality
: Lighter
Density
: ON
ECM
: OFF
Sender information
From flag reception before sending of image
data until sending of RCP frame
From flag reception before reception of
image data until reception of RCP frame
Used to make communication not in a
simulation process but in the normal screen
and measure the time.
Enter the simulation for communication time
check and check the time.
msec

Operation/Procedure

When there are two or more send/receive operations of image data in


one communication, only the time of the last send/receive data near
the end is measured.

1. Enter the set value. (Valid only 1 to 5)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

2. The entered bit is alternatively switched between 0 and 1 and


the target signal name is highlighted.

66-37

3. Press the [START] key to send the signal.


When the [CUSTUM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section

Adjustment/Setting/Check
Speaker sound volume adjustment
FAX

Operation/procedure
The following test sound is delivered to the line and the speaker to
adjust the sound kind and volume.

66-32
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Receive data check
FAX
Operation

The send level to the line is the set value of soft SW.
The set values of the selected sound kind and volume are written to
each soft SW.
1. Sound kinds pattern

Operation/procedure

Operation/Procedure

Sound kinds (Test sound)


RINGER
Call sound
Line monitor sound (Test
LINE MONITO sound: communication
signal sound)
On-hook (Test sound,
ON HOOK
communication signal
sound)
SCAN FINISH Scan finish sound
Communication finish
TX/RX FINISH
sound
DTMF
DTFM send sound

Signal detection is checked and the result is displayed.

LAR: (MED. Value + 1)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

MED: (SMA value +1) - (LAR value 1)

The fixed data received from the line are checked and the result is displayed.
When data are coincident, OK is displayed. When not, NG is displayed.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
66-33
Purpose
Function (Purpose)
Section
Item

Operation test/check
Signal detection check
FAX
Operation

Sound volume set value


DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.

DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.


DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.

SMA: 1 - (MED. Value + 1)


2. Sound volume pattern
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 40

66-41
Purpose
Function
(Purpose)

Adjustment/Setting/Check
CI signal check

Operation/procedure
When the [START] key is pressed, the call signal from CI pin is
detected to deliver the call sound to the line and the speaker. The volume of call sound follows the soft SW.
Signal detection and delivery of pseudo-call sound at detection are
executed until the interruption command is provided by pressing the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
66-52
Purpose
Section
Item
Function
(Purpose)

Operation test/check (Japan only)


FAX
Operation
Pseudo-ringer check

Operation/procedure
Press [START] key.
The call sound of the machine and the pseudo-ring are generated.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 41

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE


1. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01
E1
00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
80
81
82
84
88
E7

F1

F2

F5
F6

02
10
11
12
00
03
10
15
19
20
37
50
95
02
04

05
02
00
10
80
81
82
84
88
96

F9

99
00
10

Trouble
detection

Trouble contents
Security incompatibility error
IMC PWB communication trouble
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB ASIC error
IMC PWB CODEC IC error
IMC PWB flash ROM error
IMC PWB expaned memory module
(DIMM) error
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
IMC PWB communication trouble
(protocol)
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Parity)
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Overrun)
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Time-out)
LSU trouble
CCD black level error
CCD white level error
Shading trouble
Finisher communication trouble
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Staple motor trouble
Tray lift motor trouble
Paper alignment motor F trouble
Paper alignment motor R trouble
RAM data trouble
Incompatible trouble
Paper exit option configuration error
Toner supply failure
Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
CRUM chip communication error
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
FAX control PWB communication trouble
FAX control PWB trouble
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Protocol)
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Parity)
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Overrun)
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Time-out)
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
FAX control PWB destination error
Printer PWB communication trouble
Printer PWB trouble

MCU

FIN

MCU

Trouble code
Trouble
Trouble contents
Main Sub
detection
code code
80 Printer PWB communication trouble
F9
(Protocol)
81 Printer PWB communication trouble
(Parity)
82 Printer PWB communication trouble
(Overrun)
84 Printer PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
88 Printer PWB communication trouble
(Time-out)
H2
00 Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
01 Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
H3
00 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
10 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
11 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
H4
00 Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
01 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
20 Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
21 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
H5
01 10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor
(POD2) lead edge jam or the duplex
sensor (PPD2) rear edge jam
L1
00 Scanner feed trouble
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor trouble
11 Shifter motor trouble
31 VFM trouble
32 DCFM or DCFM2 trouble
33 VFM2 trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor trouble
L8
10 Power abnormality detection trouble
U1
01 FAX battery error
02 PANEL LOW battery error
U2
04 EEPROM communication error
20 Machine speed code data error
U7
00 RIC communication trouble
U9
00 Operation control PWB communication
OPE
trouble
80 Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Protocol)
81 Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Parity)
82 Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Overrun)
84 Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Framing)
88 Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Time-out)
99 Operation panel destination error

MCU

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 1

Trouble code
Trouble contents
Main Sub
code code
EE
EL Developer adjustment trouble
(Over-toned abnormality)
EU Developer adjustment trouble
(Under-toned abnormality)
PF
00 PF trouble

Trouble
detection

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
14

Content
Details

Check
and
remedy
00

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
10

11

12

E1

13

Cause

Details of trouble

Cause

E1

Content
Details

2. Details of trouble code


Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
A0
01

Details of trouble

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks

Security incompatibility error


When the PCL or the FAX control PWB is
installed, it does not match with
compatible/incompatible setup of the MCU
PWB security.
The security compatibility/incompatibility of
the installed PCL or FAX control PWB
does not match with that of the MCU PWB.
Cheek the security compatibility/
incompatibility of each board. Match the
security compatibility/incompatibility of the
boards.
IMC PWB communication trouble
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB trouble
IMC PWB hardware abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

Check
and
remedy
Remarks
15

Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks
16

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Remarks

17
IMC PWB ASIC error
ASIC abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB
80

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

IMC PWB CODEC IC error


CODEC IC (JBIG chip) abnormality on
IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

IMC PWB flash ROM error


Flash ROM abnormality on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB.
When the program download is abnormally
terminated, a error may occur. In this case,
download the program again.
Program ROM abnormality

Content

Cause

Check
and
remedy
81

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 2

IMC PWB expanded memory module


(DIMM) error
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) installation error.
IMC extended compression memory
module (DIMM) access error.
IMC expanded memory module installation
trouble.
IMC expanded memory module trouble.
IMC expanded memory contact trouble.
IMC PWB abnormality.
Check installation of the expanded
memory module. (Spec: Added to Slot 1.)
Replace the expanded memory module.
Replace the IMC PWB.
Extend memory abnormality for
compressed image store (DIMM module)
IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
IMC PWB page memory or work SRAM
access error
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

Print buffer page memory or work SRAM


abnormality
IMC PWB standard compression memory
error
Access error of standard compression
memory on IMC PWB
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

Standard compression image store


memory abnormality
IMC PWB smoothing IC error
IMC PWB smoothing IC abnormality
IMC PWB abnormality
Replace the IMC PWB

IMC PWB communication trouble


(protocol)
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB (Protocol error)
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB communication trouble (Parity)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer IMC (Parity error)
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E1
82

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
84

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
88

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
E7

02

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

10

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

IMC PWB communication trouble


(Overrun)
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB (Overrun error)
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB (Framing error)
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
IMC PWB communication trouble
(Time-out)
Communication trouble between MCU and
IMC PWB (Time-out error)
IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
LSU trouble
BD signal from LSU is not detected in a
constant cycle (Kept OFF or ON)
LSU connector or LSU inside harness
trouble or disconnection.
Polygon motor rotation abnormality.
Laser does not illuminate.
MCU PWB failure.
Check for disconnection of the LSU
connector.
Check the LSU operation with SIM 61-1.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check laser LED lighting.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
CCD black level error
CCD black reference plate scan level
abnormality when the copy lamp turns off.
Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
CCD unit error.
Check flat cable installation to the CCD
unit.
Check CCD unit.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
E7
11

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

12

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

F1

00

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy
03

Content
Details
Cause

10

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 3

CCD white level error


Improper CCD white reference plate
reading level for copy lamp lighting
Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality. (Occurred in the
RSPF scan position)
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Shading trouble
White correction is not completed in the
specified number of times.
Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference.
white plate.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white plate.
Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Check CCD unit.
Check MCU PWB.
Finisher communication trouble
Communication line test error occurs when
power is turned on or after the exit of a
simulation mode.
Error in finisher communication
Connection trouble or disconnection of the
connector and harness between the body
and the finisher.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Control PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connectors and the harness of
communication line.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Paper exit roller lift-up motor operation
abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the delivery roller lift
motor operation
Staple motor trouble
Staple motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple motor
operation.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F1
15

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

19

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

20

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

37

50

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

Cause

95

F2

02

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

Tray lift motor trouble


The finisher lift-up motor does not reach
the specified position
Lift-up motor abnormality.
Lift-up motor upper limit sensor
abnormality.
Finisher PWB abnormality.
Use SIM 3-3 to check the lift-up motor
operation

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F2
04

Details of trouble
Content

Details

Paper alignment motor F trouble


Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (F)
motor operation.
Paper alignment motor R trouble
Alignment motor operation abnormality
Motor lock.
Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (R)
motor operation
RAM data trouble
Backup RAM contents are disturbed
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction by noise.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

Cause

05

F5

02

Incompatible trouble
Speed does not coincide between finisher
and main unit
A finisher which is not applicable is
installed.
Connection of a finisher incompatible with
the machine is detected.
Connect the MX-FN13 to the machine.

Paper exit option configuration error


An improper option is installed.
Configuration of the paper exit option is
improperness.
Install a proper option.

Toner supply failure


The value judged from the actual toner
supply hysteresis differs greatly from the
toner sensor value
Developing unit trouble.
Toner supply abnormality caused by
installation of unpacked toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Use SIM 25-1 to perform DV stirring.

Check
and
remedy
Content
Cause

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

F6

00

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
10

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 4

Model error
Type error
Destination error
Data abnormality
Misc error
(Model error)
When the boot program model code does
not match with the CRUM model
information
(Type error)
When the CRUM type is other than
[Genuine/Conversion/Production rotation]
(Destination error)
The destination of the body differs from
that of the CRUM
(Data abnormality)
The initial check information includes an
erroneous value.
When the max. toner supply time is 00.
When the print hard stop is 00.
CRUM chip failure.
Erroneous TNCA.
Replace the CRUM chip.
Replace the TNCA.
CRUM chip communication error
CRUM chip failure.
Developing unit contact trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Check installation of the developing unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
The copy lamp does not light up
Copy lamp abnormality.
Copy lamp harness abnormality.
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check the copy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
When the lamp lights:
Check the harnesses and connectors
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the lamp does not light:
Check the harness and connector between
the copy lamp and the MCU PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
FAX control PWB communication trouble
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB trouble
FAX control PWB abnormality
FAX control PWB defect
Replate the FAX control PWB

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F6
80

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
81

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
82

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
84

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

FAX control PWB communication trouble


(Protocol)
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Protocol error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Parity)
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Parity error)
FAX control PWB connector disconnection
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Overrun)
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Overrun error)
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Framing error)
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F6
88

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
96

Content
Details
Cause

99

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy
F9

00

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
10

80

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 5

FAX control PWB communication trouble


(Time-out)
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Time-out error)
FAX control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
Combination error between the MCU and
the FAX firmware.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
changed 04.xx or later.
The version of the FAX firmware is not
proper.
Change the version of the FAX firmware to
04.xx or later.
FAX control PWB destination error
The machine destination setup does not
coincide with the FAX control PWB
destination setup.
The machine destination setup (Sim 26-6)
does not coincide with the FAX control
PWB setup
Check the variety of FAX LIU PWB.
Check the machine destination setup (Sim
22-6) and FAX country code (Soft SW
table).
Printer PWB communication trouble
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB trouble
Printer PWB abnormality
Printer PWB defect
Replace the printer PWB

Printer PWB communication trouble


(Protocol)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Protocol error)
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
F9
81

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
82

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
84

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
88

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
H2

00

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

Printer PWB communication trouble


(Parity)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Parity error)
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB communication trouble
(Overrun)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Overrun error)
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB communication trouble
(Framing)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Framing error)
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Printer PWB communication trouble
(Time-out)
Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Time-out error)
Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.
Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
detection
Main heater lamp thermistor open
detection.
Fusing unit not installed.
Main thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Fusing unit not installed.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H2
01

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

H3

00

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

01

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

10

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 6

Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard


detection
Fusing sub thermistor open detection.
Fusing unit not installed.
Sub thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Fusing unit not installed.
Check the harness and the connector of
the thermistor and the MCU.
Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
The fusing main heater thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Main thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the main heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-1.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Sub heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
The fusing sub thermistor causes
abnormally high temperature
Sub thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
A/D value the fusing main thermistor
causes abnormally high temperature (over
230C).
Main heater lamp thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the main heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-1.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H3
11

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

H4

00

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

Sub heater lamp abnormally high


temperature soft detection trouble
A/D value the fusing sub heater lamp
thermistor causes abnormally high
temperature (over 230C).
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
20sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 140C in the
standby mode or printing.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 50C in the
pre-heat mode.
Main heater lamp thermistor defect
Main heater lamp failure
Main thermostat failure
Control PWB failure
Check the heater lamp blinking with SIM 5-2.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
01

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

20

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 7

Sub heater lamp abnormally low


temperature detection
The setup temperature (about 90C) is not
reached within the specified time (about
20sec) from turning on the power.
When the temperature of sub heater
thermistor falls below 140C in the standby
mode or printing.
When the temperature of sub heater lamp
thermistor falls below 50C in the pre-heat
mode.
Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
Control PWB failure.
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 40sec) from turning on the power.
A/D value of fusing main thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature.
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Main thermistor defect.
Main heater lamp failure.
Main thermostat failure.
Control PWB failure.
Check the main heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-1.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
H4
21

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

H5

01

Content

Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

Sub heater lamp abnormally low


temperature detection
The setup temperature (about 25C: Sim
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 40sec) from turning on the
power.
A/D value of fusing sub thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
25C )
Sub thermistor defect.
Sub heater lamp failure.
Sub thermostat failure.
Control PWB failure.
Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
SIM 5-2-2.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
circuit.
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.
10 times of continuous detection of the
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
jam or the upper paper exit sensor (POD2)
lead edge jam or the duplex sensor
(PPD2) rear edge jam
After supplying the power, one of the
above jams occurs 10 times continuously
in printing
Counting is started on supplying the
power. When any one of the above jams
occurs, one count is made. When paper
entry to the POD1 or POD2 is detected,
the counter is cleared.
A paper jam (paper rounding, etc.) near
the duplex sensor (PPD2) on the fusing
unit is not canceled completely.
POD1, POD2, PPD2 sensor breakdown or
harness connection trouble
Fusing unit installation failure
Check for jam paper in the fusing section.
(paper winding, etc.)
Check fusing unit installation.
Check the POD1, POD2 or PPD2 sensor.
Clear the trouble with SIM 14.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L1
00

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

L3

00

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

L4

01

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 8

Scanner feed trouble


Scanner feed is not completed within the
specified time.
Mirror unit defect.
Scanner wire disconnection.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror not feeds:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
Check the harness and connector between
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Scanner return trouble
Scanner return is not completed within the
specified time.
When OC copying with the mirror at the
home position, the mirror is not in the
home position.
Mirror unit defect.
The scanner wire is disconnected.
Origin detection sensor error.
Mirror motor harness abnormality.
Check the scanning operation with SIM 11.
When the mirror fails to return:
Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
Check the harness and connector between
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
with SiM 1-2.
Main motor trouble
The main motor does not rotate.
The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
or more after the main motor rotates.
The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
during rotation of the main motor.
Main motor defect.
Main motor connection, harness trouble or
disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check the main motor operation with SIM
25-1.
Check connection of the main motor
harness and connector.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L4
11

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

31

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

32

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

33

Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

Shifter motor trouble


The shifter home position detection signal
is not detected when the shifter is
operating.
Shifter motor trouble or harnes connection
trouble and disconnection.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check the shifter motor operation with SIM
3-11.
Check connection of the shifter motor
harness/connector.
Replace the shifter motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
VFM fan trouble
5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation,
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor
lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
Fan motor connection harness connection
trouble or disconnection.
MCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the
fan motor.
Check connection of the fan motor
harness and connector.
Replace the fan motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
DCFM or DCFM2 fan trouble
5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation,
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor
lock signal detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
Fan motor connection harness connection
trouble or disconnection.
MCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the
fan motor.
Check connection of the fan motor
harness and connector.
Replace the fan motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
VFM2 fan trouble
5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation,
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor
lock signal detected for 1 sec.
Fan motor trouble.
Fan motor connection harness connection
trouble or disconnection.
MCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the
fan motor.
Check connection of the fan motor
harness and connector.
Replace the fan motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
L6
10

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

Check
and
remedy

L8

10

Content
Details

Cause
Check
and
remedy
U1

01

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

02

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

U2

04

Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

20

Content
Details

Cause
Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 9

Polygon motor lock trouble


The polygon motor does not rotate.
The motor lock signal is detected for 18sec
or more after the polygon motor rotates.
The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
during rotation of the polygon motor.
Polygon motor unit failure
Polygon motor connection, harness trouble
or disconnection
MCU PWB failure
Check the polygon motor operation with
SIM 61-1.
Check the connectors and the harness of
polygon motor
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Power abnormality detection trouble
The power status monitoring signal keeps
power OFF state after passing the
specified time (2sec).
Circuit around the power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) failure.
Check whether power status monitoring
signal (PSSTS) on MCU PWB is OPEN or
not.
Replace MCU PWB.
FAX battery error
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
control PWB falls.
Check voltage of the SRAM back up
battery.
Replace the battery.
PANEL LOW battery error
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
The voltage of the panel clock function
battery falls.
Check voltage of panel clock function
battery.
Replace the battery.
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM communication error
EEPROM defect.
ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit failure.
Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Clear trouble with SIM 16.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Machine speed code data error
The machine boot speed information is not
identical to the model code speed
information
EEPROM defect.
SIM operation error.
Check for matching of the machine and
model information setting in SIM26-57.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
U7
00

Details of trouble
Content
Details

Cause

U9

00

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
80

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
81

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
82

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy

RIC communication trouble


Error in communication with RIC.
Error in communication test after turning
on the power or canceling SIM.
Connector harness contact trouble or
disconnection.
RIC control PWB trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Malfunction by noises.
Check the communication cable,
connectors from the RIC box to the main
body.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on the operation control PWB.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Protocol)
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Protocol error)
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control.
PWB and the MCU PWB.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Parity)
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Parity error)
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Overrun)
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Overrun error)
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.

Trouble
code
Main Sub
code code
84
U9

Details of trouble
Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
88

Content
Details
Cause

Check
and
remedy
99

Content
Details

Cause

EE

EL

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

Cause

EU

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details

Cause

PF

00

Check
and
remedy
Content
Details
Cause
Check
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 10

Operation control PWB communication


trouble (Framing)
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Framing error)
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Operation control PWB communication
trouble (Time-out)
Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation PWB (Time-out error)
Operation control PWB connector
disconnection.
Harness failure of the operation control
PWB and the MCU PWB.
Check the connectors and the harness of
the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Operation panel destination error
An error occurred in checking the
destination of the operation panel and the
main body.
Erroneous connection the operation panel
unit.
SIM setup error.
Check the destination information of the
operation panel unit and the MCU.
(Sim26-6/22)
Developer adjustment trouble (Over-toned
abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected over-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
Developer adjustment trouble (Undertoned abnormality)
An abnormality occurred in execution of
automatic developer adjustment.
Sample data was detected under-toner.
Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Toner concentration trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
MCU PWB failure.
Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
developer adjustment.
PF trouble
The copy inhibit command from RIC is
received.
Judged by the host.
Inform to the host.

[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
(For 26cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process

DV

Fusing

Paper feed

Transport
Others

: Replace

: Lubricate
Parts

Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower fuser bearing
Thermistor cleaning pad
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Transport roller unit
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter

75k

150k

225k

300k

375k

450k

525k

600k

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 1

Note

Usable for three PM cycles

Changing criteria for parts: 100k

(For 31cpm)
: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
: Cleaning
Unit
Process

DV

Fusing

Paper feed

Transport
Others

: Replace

: Lubricate
Parts

Drum
Cleaner blade
Seal F/R
Drum frame unit
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit
Separation pawl unit
Star ring
Developer
Toner filter unit
DV blade
DV side sheet F
DV side sheet R
Toner sensor
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Upper cleaning pad
Lower separation pawl
Thermistor
Fuser gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower fuser bearing
Thermistor cleaning pad
Paper guide
Pickup roller
Paper feeding sheet
Pickup roller and feed roller
(RSPF)
Transport roller unit
Gear
Paper feed rollers
Gears
Ozone filter

100k

150k

200k

300k

400k

450k

500k

600k

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 2

Note

Usable for three PM cycles

Changing criteria for parts: 100k

2. Details of Maintenance
Unit
A. Process unit

B. Developing unit

C. Fusing section

D. Optical section

E. Paper feed
section

Parts
(1)
(2)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1)
(2)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

F. Side door unit

G. 1st paper exit unit


H. Laser unit
I. Power unit
J. PWB

Unit
L. Drive section

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Drum
Drum section

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Main charger
Cleaning blade
Drum frame unit
Moquette F/R
Separation pawl

Developer
Toner filter unit
DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
DV blade
Toner sensor
Thermostat
Thermistor
Paper guide
Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp
Upper cleaning pad
Fusing separation pawl (upper)
Upper heat roller
Thermistor cleaning pad
CCD unit
Lamp unit
a. Lamp
b. PWB
c. Wire
d. Mirror motor
Paper feed solenoid
Tray sensor PWB
Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor
Multi manual
a. Paper feed roller/
paper feed
pickup roller
b. Reverse sensor
c. Separation sheet
d. Clutch/solenoid
Upper 500
a. Paper feed roller/
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
Lower 500
a. Paper feed roller/
sheets tray
pickup roller
paper feed
b. Separation sheet
c. Lift up unit
d. Transport clutch
e. Paper feed clutch
f. Transport clutch
g. Solenoid
h. Sensor PWB
Transport roller unit
Transport roller
DUP transport roller
DUP motor
Cooling fan
Transport/exit roller
LSU
Power source
Option CN PWB
IMC PWB
MCU PWB
Motherboard PWB
Second interface PWB

M. Transport section
N. Operation section

O. Switch
P. RSPF

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Parts
DUP reverse motor
Main drive motor
Toner motor
PS transport clutch
Paper feed clutch
Drive unit
Lift up motor
Transport roller
Operation section
OPU PWB
Key PWB
LCD unit
Power switch
Document tray a. Document tray unit
section
b. Document length
sensor
c. Document width
resistor PWB
Paper feed unit a. Paper feed clutch
section
b. Pickup roller
c. Paper feed roller
d. Paper feed unit
e. Separation sheet
f. Sensor
Transport
a. Transport unit
section
b. PS clutch
c. Pressure release
solenoid
d. RSPF motor
e. Transport roller
f. Roller
g. Sensor
h. Roller
i. Roller
Base section
a. Interface PWB
b. Solenoid
c. Book sensor
d. Sensor

A. Process unit
(Note for servicing the OPC drums)
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
Note:
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care not to
touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both edges of the
OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to the cleaning
blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade may flip.)

K. Ozone filter

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 3

5mm

5mm

[Countermeasures]

(2) Drum section

If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,


perform the following countermeasures.

a. Main charger
1

1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.


4

2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.


[Check method]

Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt
and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following
method.

Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note:
Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
3

If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area
in the previously exposed section.

b. Cleaning blade
1

2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping the


OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not recovered,
replace the OPC drum.

(1) Drum
2
2

4
3

c. Drum frame unit

Note: When installing the process unit in the main unit after replacing
the drum, process unit may not be able to install by reason of the
drum drive coupling position.
In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees and install again.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 4

B. Developing section

d. Moquette F/R

(1) Developer

Rotate the MG roller to discharge developer.

Note: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach new one.
e. Separation pawl
Disassembly* Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.

Assembly* Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.

(2) Toner filter unit


With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 5

(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R

(5) Toner sensor


Execution of cleaning the sensor must be made after discharging
used DV in DV replacement.
Without removing the MG roller, use waste cloth to remove toner
from the sensor surface in the arrow direction.

[DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference]

Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing DV.

0
Molt
edge
reference
0.3

Molt
edge
reference

C. Fusing section

0.3

0.5

Projection edge
reference

0.5

Projection edge
reference

(4) DV blade

[DV blade attachment reference]

2
1

[Cross-section]
Bump
0
reference

0.5

0.5

Rib reference

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 6

(4) Fusing separation pawl (lower)

(1) Thermostat
Note: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat, the
tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9 kgs.

(5) Lower heat roller


3

(2) Thermistor

(3) Paper guide

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 7

(6) Heater lamp

(9) Upper heat roller


1

1
2

(7) Upper cleaning pad

1
2
1
2

(10) Thermistor cleaning pad

1
2
2

(8) Fusing separation pawl (upper)

2
1
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 8

D. Optical section
(1) CCD unit

2
1

1
3

1
1

4
1

1
2

1
3

5
4

1
3
a. Lamp

(2) Lamp unit


1
3

1
1

2
b. PWB

6
2
3
5
2
4
4

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 9

(1) Paper feed solenoid

c. Wire

1
2

(2) Tray sensor PWB

1
2

(3) Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor


d. Mirror motor

3
A

(4) Multi manual paper feed

a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller

E. Paper feed section

A
B

A
B
C

Paper feed roller


Pickup roller
Separation sheet

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 10

c. Separation sheet

1)

2)
5
6

3)

Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the

axis. One rice grain for each.


Installation*Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes under the
roller arm (2).

d. Clutch/solenoid
(Clutch)

1
6
5
4
2

3
2

3
5

LOCK

2
1

4
b. Reverse sensor

1
1
2

(Solenoid)

1
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 11

(5) Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed

(Clutch)

a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller

A
A

A
A

1
4

1
3

Note: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake the developer cartridge.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 12

4
2
1
3

3
2

b. Separation sheet

1
3

3
4

When replacing, be careful not

to adhere conduction grease


(black) to the drive section.

Slightly apply grease GE676


(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
drum boss.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 13

1)

3
2

4
2
b. Separation sheet

Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the

axis. One rice grain for each.


Grease should not come out when assembling.

(6) Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed


a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller

Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the

axis. One rice grain for each.


Grease should not come out when assembling.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 14

c. Lift up unit

1
2

1
1
3
2
d. Transport clutch

g. Solenoid

1
3
3
2

h. Sensor PWB

1
e. Paper feed clutch

2
3
1
3

3
2

F. Side door unit


(1) Transport roller unit
3

f. Transport clutch

Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transfer roller

unit bosses.
AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 15

(2) Transport roller

(4) DUP motor


1

2
3

1
1

3
1

G. 1st paper exit unit


(1) Cooling fan

(3) DUP transport roller

2
3
3

1
1

4
1

2
5

3
2

1
4
5
2

3
1
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 16

(2) Transport/exit roller

(Except North America)

2
1

1
3

4
1

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 17

1
1

2
1

2
1

H. Laser unit
Note: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.

(1) LSU
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.
3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing screws to
remove the LSU.

Note: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gate bracket,
and fix with the screw.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 18

1
2
2

2
3

I. Power unit
(1) Power source

J. PWB
(1) Option CN PWB

1
1
3

1
1

1
3
4
3

2
3
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 19

(2) IMC PWB

(4) Motherboard PWB

2
1
2

1
1

(3) MCU PWB

1
3

3
3

4
3
1

3
2
3

2
1
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 20

(5) Second interface PWB

2
1

2
1
2

K. Ozone filter

1
2

1
3

2
1

3
1

1
2
1

1
2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 21

(3) Toner motor

1
2

(4) PS transport clutch

L. Drive section
(1) DUP reverse motor

1
3
4

(2) Main drive motor

2
1

2
3

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 22

(5) Paper feed clutch

(7) Lift up motor

1
2
1

3
1
2

2
1

(6) Drive unit

3
1

1
4
3

3
2

M. Transport section
(1) Transport roller

Drive unit (Grease application part)

2
1

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 23

(2) OPU PWB

2
3

(3) Key PWB

N. Operation section
(1) Operation section

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 24

(4) LCD unit

P. RSPF
(1) Document tray section
a. Document tray unit

1
2
2
2

O. Switch
2

(1) Power switch

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 25

(2) Paper feed unit section

b. Document length sensor

a. Paper feed clutch

2
1
1
1
3

3
2
2

b. Pickup roller

c. Document width resistor PWB

2
1
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 26

c. Paper feed roller

d. Paper feed unit

2
3

e. Separation sheet

2
3

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 27

b. PS clutch

f. Sensor

3
2

1
2
1

c. Pressure release solenoid

(3) Transport section


a. Transport unit

d. RSPF motor

3
2

1
1

3
1

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 28

f. Roller

2
1
2

1
<Note for disassembling the motor>
The motor is positioned by the jig. Use the mark when assembling
it to the original position.
e. Transport roller

1
2

g. Sensor

3
2
3

2
1
1

3
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 29

(4) Base section

h. Roller

a. Interface PWB

1
2

1
2

b. Solenoid

1
2
3

I
O R GI

i. Roller

1
1
2

1
2

c. Book sensor

3
1

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 30

d. Sensor

3. Other related items


A. Counter clear
Item
Maintenance cycle setting
Jam/trouble counter clear
Paper feed counter clear
Scan/Stapler counter clear
Maintenance counter clear
Developing counter clear

SIM
Remarks
SIM 21-1
SIM 24-1
SIM 24-2
SIM 24-3
SIM 24-4 *
SIM 24-5 After execution of SIM25-2,
this counter is cleared.
SIM 24-6
SIM 24-7 At drum replacement
SIM 24-9

Copy counter clear


Drum counter clear
Printer, IMC, Duplex, other
counter clear
FAX counter clear
SIM 24-10
Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15

31 sheet model: When maintenance message is displayed, replace

consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance,


then clear the replaced part's counter only.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 31

[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE

A. Firmware update method


(for Copier, and fax firm)

1. Firmware update procedure

Following operational procedures are for:


Copier firm

(Necessary items for update)

fax firm

A Personal computer
B RS232C cross cable (D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin, or D-sub 25pin to
D-sub 9pin)

1)

Make sure copier is off, and connect it to PC with download cable


beforehand.

2)

Start up the maintenance program on PC. Select the model name


from the model selection dialogue box.

3)

Make sure only "Printer Control Board" tree is visible under "Simulation Command List".

4)

Turn on the copier. The machine starts up in the download mode.

5)

Additional tree will be visible when downloading maintenance program on PC.

C Software for version-up

(Target PWB)
1 MCU PWB
2 Panel PWB
3 IMC PWB
4 Finisher PWB

Outline of Update Procedure


PC
C

Download
data
RS232C connector
(9pin or 25pin)

RS232C cross cable


(D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin)
or
(D-sub 25pin to D-sub 9pin)
I/F circuit (9pin)
1

MCU-PWB

Operation
panel

IMC
PWB

Finisher

Prepare following files necessary for program update


Maintenance software: maintenance.exe
Andromeda module file: ProcModelR.mdl

Make sure to start up maintenance program before turn on the


machine.

Maintenance tool driver: SFZEJENU.inf

Ready to start download process


when these trees appear.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 1

6)

When downloading copier firm, expand "Special(Copier)", and


double-click on "All Data areas Download".

7)

Select download file(*.dat), and press "Open" button.

8)

Download procedure starts automatically.

9)

Notice message "Download is complete. Check the copier panel


to make sure the download is complete." will appear on PC.

10) Close the maintenance program, and turn off the copier. Turn on
the copier again after pulling the plug.
This is the end of download procedure.
It is possible that download process somehow went wrong if the
copier does not start up properly. In that case, start up the copier
and maintenance program in download mode by repeating the step
1)-5) again. And then, Expand "Special", and double-click on "Confirm Error Status". If any of the message besides "No error has been
occurred" appears, it means that download is incomplete, so please
try again.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 2

B. Others (Troubleshooting)
Followings are the error possibly occur during the download process and troubleshooting method.
No
1

Warning/error message
Incorrect destination. Continue with the
download process?

Incorrect download file.

No downloadable data included.

This option not available.

The data size exceeds the Flash ROM size.


Try again with the appropriate size of data.

Time out error.

Communication (incoming) error.

Checksum error.

Error during the download process. Error


code: 0xXXXXXXXX

10

An error. [0xXXXXXXXX]

Detail
Destination of download file and copier doesn't match.
Possible to select either continue or cancel the job.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
To change destination, select "Yes". If not, select "No" and cancel download process.
Invalid download file for the machine is selected, or the file format is not correct.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Unable to find appropriate data in selected download file.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Download procedure is executed on uninstalled optional kit.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm installed optional kit.
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Panel flash ROM size is not enough to execute download procedure.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Exchange the flash ROM to the one which has more capacity.
Transmission error
Unable to receive data from the machine among the certain period of time.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Incorrect download procedure.
The machine did not proceed download procedure correctly.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Make sure the communication device of PC(either COM or parallel) is under right condition.
Transmission error
The check sum value of the transmission data is mismatch.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC (either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
Download data file operation error.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming the selected download file is not abnormal and
not using other application.
The error occurred except the above errors.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC(either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 3

RSPF-Paper feed
clutch

RSPF-DupSOL

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 1

Fuser-Lamp(x2)

Thermister (x 2 Analog)

CN14
Key/LED PWB

OPU-PWB

LSU-UN

APC-PWB
LSU-PWB

Polygon-Motor

CN501

Fuser Unit

CN19
LCD
Touch Panel

Coin
Vender

CN27

WakeUp SW

CN28
Auditer I/F

BD-PWB
BD-Sensor

HVU

CN31

CSS1H: Tray Detector


PSRSOL: Paper Stop Roller Sol.
PCL1H: PickUp Cluth
LUM1H: Lift Up Motor

CN3
Toner-Motor

Main / Sub

Power Supply

Power Unit

CN10

OPERATION PANEL

CN502
DEV/CRUM

CN7
TRAY PAPER
SENSOR

CN12

OP-LO tray
PPD2: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2: Paper Empty
LUD2: Lift Up Detector
CSS2: Casette Detector
DRS2: Door Detector
PCL2: Pick Up Clutch
LUM2: Lift Up Motor

CN18
InterLock
Switch

CN29

OP-UP tray
PPD1: Paper Pass Detector
PAP1: Paper Empty
LUD1: Lift Up Detector
CSS1: Casette Detector
DRS1: Door Detector
PCL1: Pick Up Clutch
LUM1: Lift Up Motor
TRCL: Verical transport roller
clutch 2

CN8
MAIN-Motor

CN30

HPEMPTY: HandpaperEmpty sensor


HPIN: Handpaper IN Sensor
HPTRAY1: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 1
HPTRAY2: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 2
HPSIZE1: Handpaper Size Sensor 1
HPSIZE2: Handpaper Size Sensor 2
HPWS: Handpaper Width Sensor (Analog)
HPSOL: Handpaper PickUp Solenoid

Manual Feed Unit


Main body paper feed load

CN38

CS interface PWB

IMC PWB
256/512MB DIMM (x 2)

D-Sub 15pin

Reactor
(CE Only)

PS-SW

PS Cooling Fan

Front Cooling FAN

Defog Heater
(Japan Only)

AC

SPCL PWB

FAX PWB

Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector F


Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector R
Delivery Roller Position Detector
Delivery Tray Lower Limit Detector
Delivery Tray Upper Limit Detector
Paper Level Detector
Paper Pass Detector
Paper Rear Edge Detector C
Paper Rear Edge Detector F
Paper Rear Edge Detector R
Staple Empty Detector
Staple Lead Detector
Staple Home Position Sensor
Staple Tray Paper Detector

Inner Finisher Unit (Optional)

CN

Paper Feed Motor

CN22

Multi-step tray Unit (Optional)

CN15

CN23
(AB / INCH )

Paper Feed Motor

CN11

CCD-PWB

Option
Connector PWB

CN5

PCL2H: Pick Up Clutch


LUM2H: Lift Up Motor
TRCLH: Vertical Transport Roller Clutch

CS interface PWB

Paper Remove
Sol

Duplex Paper Out Sensor

MCU-PWB

Paper Size Sensor


AB
INCH

D-Sub 25pin

Down-Load-Connector
D-Sub 9pin

Plasmacluster
(Download PC with exclusive connection)

CN

2nd tray Unit (Optional)


CSS2H: Casette Detector
DRS2H: Door Detector
PPD2H: Paper Pass Detector
PAP2H: Paper Empty
LUD2H: Lift Up Detector

PCS1H ; Pick Up Solenoid

PAP1H ; Paper Empty


LUD1H ; Lift Up Detector
PPD1H (PIN) : Paper IN

Main tray Unit

CN503

Paper Full
Sensor

Humidity Sensor

CN26

Duplex Conveyance Sensor

CN25

CN1

Defog
Heater

Mirror HP
Sensor

CN6

Duplex-Motor

CN504

CN4

CPLD Writer
CN505

CN21

Copy-Lamp

Scanner
Cover
Sensor

Mirror-Motor

INNER
FINISHER PWB

Pout Cooling Fan (x 2)

Duplex 2 Motor

CN32
CN2

Pout 2 Ssensor

Except North America

CN17

Pout Gate
Solenoid

Pout Sensor

Shifter
HP
Except North America
Sensor

2nd POUT
COVER SENSOR

Shifter-Motor

Fuser Cooling Fan (x 2)

POUT2_R: Paper OUT (Right Tray) Detector


PFULL2_R: Paper Full (Right Tray) Detector
KEEPSOL1/2: KeepSolenoid (Right Tray)

Right Tray Paper OUT Unit (Optional)

RSPF-Pressure
release SOL

RSPF-CNT-PWB

RSPF-Motor

L2

L1

RSPF-SEN-PWB
RSPF Cover Sens
RSPF PS Sens
RSPF Paper Empty
RSPF Paper Out Sensor
RSPF Paper Width Sens (Analog)
RSPF BOOK Sens

RSPF Unit
Delivery Roller Lift Motor
Paper Alignment Motor F
Paper Alignment Motor R
Paper Delivery Motor
Paper Transport Motor
Stalpe Motor
Tray Lift Motor
Rear Edge Take-up Roller Solenoid
Paper Pass Gate Solenoid
Paddle Solenoid
Control PWB Cooling Fan
Stapler Cooling Fan
Paper Entry Gate
Safety Switch

[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION

1. Block diagram

A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Mother PWB

CN9

2. Actual wiring chart

CN5(52746-1571)
V0
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
3.3V_EXT 7
8
D0
D1
9
D-GND 10
11
D2
12
D3
D-GND 13
DISP
14
VEE
15
CN6
(SM02(8.0)
B-BHS-1-TB)
CCFT+ 1
/CCFT
2

AB ONLY
PAPER SIZE SENSOR
(AB ONLY)
Sub scanning side
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
1
/ABJP
2
DGND
3
LED1#
5
LED2#
7
LED3#
9
5V
11
DGND
13
DSCLK#
15
DSIN0
17
/INCHJP
18
DGND
4
LED1#
6
LED2#
8
LED3#
10
5V
12
DGND
14
DSCLK#
16
DSIN3
19
DSIN2A
20
DSIN2B
21
DGND
22
DGND
23
DSCLK#
24
DSCLK#
25
5V
26
5V
27
LED0#
28
LED0#
OCCOVER 29
30
DGND
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
33
MHP
34
DGND

CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
1
/ABJP
2
DGND
3
LED1#
4
LED1#
5
LED2#
6
LED2#
7
LED3#
8
LED3#
9
5V
10
5V
11
DGND
12
DGND
13
DSCLK#
14
DSCLK#
15
DSIN0
16
DSIN3
/INCHJP
17
DGND
18
19
DSIN2A
21
DGND
23
DSCLK#
25
5V
27
LED0#
20
DSIN2B
22
DGND
24
DSCLK#
26
5V
28
LED0#
OCCOVER 29
30
DGND
5V(PULL UP) 31
5V(PULL UP) 32
33
MHP
34
DGND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

(N.C)
(N.C)

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8

Main scanning side


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

LED1#
LED2#
LED3#
5V
DGND
DSCLK
DSIN0
N.C
292250-8

OC COVER SENSOR
1
2
3

OC COVER
DGND
PULL UP
292250-3

MHP SENSOR
3
PULL UP
2
MHP
1
DGND
S3B-PH-K-S

INCH ONLY
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

PAPER SIZE SENSOR


(INCH ONLY)
Sub scanning side
1
2
3
4
5

DSIN2A
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-5

Main scanning side


1
2
3
4
5

DSIN2B
DGND
DSCLK#
5V
LED0#
292250-5

OC COVER SENSOR
1 OC COVER
2
DGND
3
PULL UP
292250-3

MHP SENSOR
3
PULL UP
2
MHP
1
DGND
S3B-PH-K-S

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 2

CN**(*****)
1
V0
2
LP
3
D-GND
4
CP
5
D-GND
6
M
7 3.3V_EXT
8
D0
9
D1
10
D-GND
11
D2
12
D3
13
D-GND
14
DISP
15
VEE

PANEL UNIT

CN2(52271-2479)
24
GND
23 INFO_LED
22 /START_KEY
21
SENSE0
20
SENSE1
19
SENSE2
18
SENSE3
17
SENSE4
16
SCAN0
15
SCAN1
14
SCAN2
13
SCAN3
12
SCAN4
11
/SEG0
10
/SEG1
9
/SEG2
8
/SEG3
7
COM0
6
COM1
5
COM2
4 /BZR_PWM
3 START_LED
2
5Vsub
1
GND

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

FPC

OPTICAL BASE PLATE (1/2)

MCU PWB

KEY PWB

CN1(IMSA-9619S-24C-TB)

GND
INFO_LED
/START_KEY
SENSE0
SENSE1
SENSE2
SENSE3
SENSE4
SCAN0
SCAN1
SCAN2
SCAN3
SCAN4
/SEG0
/SEG1
/SEG2
/SEG3
COM0
COM1
COM2
/BZR_PWM
START_LED
5Vsub
GND

CN4(52271-0469)
X2/
1
Y2/
2
X1
3
Y1
4

LCD UNIT

CN1(52610-1871)
18
DGND
17 +24V_OP
16
DGND
15
+5V
14
DGND
13
+3.3V
12
+3.3V
11 RES_OPU
10 /CLK_OPU
9 CRDY_OPU
8 SRDY_OPU
7 /TXD_OPU
6 /RXD_OPU
5
DGND
4 Standby_LED
3 /WakeUp_Key
2
+5Vsub
1
DGND

OPU PWB

CN9(52207-1885)
18
DGND
17
24V1
16
DGND
15
+5V
DGND
14
+3.3V
13
+3.3V
12
RES_OPU
11
/CLK_OPU
10
CRDY_OPU 9
SRDY_OPU
8
7
/TXD_OPU
/RXD_OPU
6
5
DGND
Standby_LED 4
/WakeUp_Key 3
+5Vsub
2
DGND
1

TOUCH PANEL

A. MCU - Panel unit, Optical base plate sensor section

<MIRROR MOTOR>

CCD PWB

RSPF

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 3

FINISHER

CN903(SUB-D9)
1
N.C
2
SVCMDX
3
SVSTSX
4
DTRX
5
DGND
6
DSRX
7
RTSX
8
CTSX
9
N.C

CN905(SUB-D15)
1
PGND
2
24V_FN
3
/FINCRDY
4
FINSTS
5
/RESET#
6
FINPIN
7
24V_FN
8
PGND
9
DGND
10
3.3V1
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINCMD
13
5V1
14
/FINDET
15
DGND

CN904(SUB-D25)
1
DGND
2
24V_RSPF
3
/SPFMODB#
4
/SPFMODA#
5
SPFMODA#
6
SELC#
7
SELB#
8
SPFPDA
9
SPFRSOL#
10
SPFPSOL#
11
SPFPAPER
12
24V_RSPF
13
DGND
14
PGND
15
YSPF
16
DGND
17
SPFMODB#
18
SPFWS
19
3.3V1
20
SELA#
21
SPFCLH#
22
SPFGSOL#
23
SPFPDB
24
5V1
25
PGND

CN906(52147-0510)
1
MIRMODA#
2
MIRMODB#
3
/MIRMODA#
4
/MIRMODB#
5
24V_MIR

COPY LAMP UNIT

CN30(B18B-PHDSS-B)
2
DGND
1
5V
4
3.3V
3
SVSTS
6
DTR
5
CTS
8
SVCMD
7
RTS
10
DSR
9
/FINCRDY#
12
/FINSRDY
11
FINSTS#
14
FINCMD
13
/RESET#
16
/MSFINDET
15
/FINDET
18
PGND
17
24V1

CN901(B18B-PHDRS-B)
1
DGND
2
5V
3
3.3V
4
SVSTS
5
DTR
6
CTS
7
SVCMD
8
RTS
9
DSR
10
/FINCRDY
11
/FINSRDY
12
FINSTS
13
FINCMD
14
/RESET#
15
FINPIN
16
/FINDET
17
PGND
18
24VOP

CN26(IMSA-9604S-04C)
1
PGND
2
PGND
3
/CL
4
24V

CN31(B26B-PHDSS-B)
2
MIRMO0#
1
MIRMO2#
4
/MIRMODB#
3
MIRMO1#
6
MIRMODA#
5
MIRMODB#
8
DGND
7
/MIRMODA#
10
SPFWS
9
DGND
12
YSPF
11
/SPFMODB#
14
/SPFMODA#
13
SPFMODB#
16
SPFMODA#
15
SELC#
18
SELB#
17
SELA#
20
SPFCLH#
19
SPFRSOL#
22
SPFGSOL#
21
SPFPSOL#
24
SPFPAPER
23
5V
26
PGND
25
24V1

4
3
2
1

PGND
PGND
/CL
24V

CN6(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)
1
CCDD4
2
CCDD3
3
CCDD5
4
CCDD2
5
CCDD6
6
CCDD1
7
CCDD7
8
CCDD0
9
ADSCLK
10
ADWRT
11
ADSD
12
/f1
13
3.3V
14
/SH
15
DGND
16
/f2
17
DGND
18
DGND
19
DGND
20
/REFCK
21
DGND
22
/DATCK
23
DGND
24
/FR
25
/DUMC
26
/PB
27
/OB
28
5V
29
DGND
30
12V
31
DGND
32
12V

CN902(B26B-PHDSS-B)
1
MIRMO0#
2
MIRMO2#
3
/MIRMODB#
4
MIRMO1#
5
MIRMODA#
6
MIRMODB#
7
DGND
8
/MIRMODA#
9
SPFWS
10
DGND
11
YSPF
12
/SPFMODB#
13
/SPFMODA#
14
SPFMODB#
15
SPFMODA#
16
SELC#
17
SELB#
18
SELA#
19
SPFCLH#
20
SPFRSOL#
21
SPFGSOL#
22
SPFPSOL#
23
SPFPAPER
24
5V
25
PGND
26
24VOP

32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CCDD4
CCDD3
CCDD5
CCDD2
CCDD6
CCDD1
CCDD7
CCDD0
ADSCLK
ADWRT
ADSD
/f1
3.3V
/SH
DGND
/f2
DGND
DGND
DGND
/REFCK
DGND
/DATCK
DGND
/FR
/DUMC
/PB
/OB
5V
DGND
12V
DGND
12V

CN1(FF4-32-S15D3-FA)

OPTICAL BASE PLATE(2/2)

CZHR-03V-S CZHR-03V-S
1
3
PullUp
2
2
POUT1
3
1
DGND

3
4
1
5
6
2
10
14
13
12
16
15
8

1
2
3
4
5
6

Red
1
2
3
4
5

CN2(B6B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
SW24V
SFTDA#
SFTDB#
/SFTDA#
/SFTDB#

CN4(B5B-PH-K-R)
SW24V
DUP2MODA#
DUP2MODB#
/DUP2MODA#
/DUP2MODB#

CN1(B5B-PAEK-1) Blue
SW24V / SW24V_Dup
1
2
DPXA
3
DPXB
4
/DPXA
5
/DPXB

CN22(S3B-PH-K-M) Green
1
24V
2
/PGSOL1
3
/PGSOL2

5V
SFTHP
DGND
5V(PullUp)
POUT1
DGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
TFANOUT
TFANRDY
PGND
DGND

CN32(B16B-PHDSS-B)
7
N.C
9
N.C
11
N.C

(N.C)

6
9

/POUT2B_DET

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

10
8

POUTCOV
DGND

DGMD

4
5
7

5V
PFULL2
DGND

5V
SFTHP
DGND

GP1A71L3

SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
1
TFANOUT
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2

SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
1
TFANOUT
1
3
TFANRDY
3
2
PGND
2

3
2
1

S 3B-PH-K-S

<COOLING FAN 2>

<INTERNAL COOLING FAN>

<COOLING FAN 1>

<PAPER OUT1 SENSOR>

<DUPLEX 2 MOTOR>

Except North America: Installed


North America: Not installed

<SHIFTER MOTOR>

<DUPLEX MOTOR>

<PAPER OUT GATE SL>

PINK
BROWN
GRAY

<SHIFTER HP SENSOR>

Except North America: Installed


North America: Not installed

[1st PAPER EXIT UNIT]

<PAPER EXIT COVER OPEN/CLOSE


SENSOR SW>

<2nd PAPER FULL SENSOR>

<2nd PAPER EXIT SENSOR>

* When right paper exit unit (option) is installed:


Right paper exit door open/close sensor

292250-2
POUTCOV
1
2
DGND

DF3A-3P-2DS
2
5V
3
PFULL2
1
DGND

GP1SQ44S

292250-3
GP1SQ73P
3
5V(PULL_UP)
1
POUT2
2
DGND

3
2
1

CN21(B10B-PASK-1)
5V(PULL_UP)
POUT2
DGND

Except North America: Installed


North America: Not installed

[2nd PAPER EXIT UNIT]

B. MCU - Optical base plate 2, OP I/F PWB, 1st paper exit unit, 2nd paper exit unit

MCU PWB

OP I/F PWB

RIC / DOWNLOAD/ PCI

MCU PWB

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 4


26
28
30
16
18
20
22
24

/HPIN
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPEMPTY
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
CSS1H
DGND

CN14(B8B-PH-K-S)
1
24V
2
/PCS1H
3
DGND
4
/PIN
5
5V
6
/PAP1H
7
N.C
8
/LUD1H

6
8

/LUM1H
PGND

3
4

24V
PSRSOL/

2
1

32
34
35
36

5V
PPSEN
DGND
DGND

/PCL1H
24V

9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
10
12
14

HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
HPSIZE2
DGND
5V(PULL UP)
3.3V
HPWS
DGND
DGND
DUP2SEN
5V(PULL UP)

CN15(B36B-PUDSS-1)
5
24V
7
/HPSOL

(N.C)

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

BU03P-TR-P-H
DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP
3
2
1
PHNR-3-H

PHNR-5-H

1
2
3
4
5

BU05P-TR-P-H
HPEMPTY
DGND
PULL UP
CSS1H
DGND
5
4
3
2
1

PHNR-5-H

SMP-02V-BC BLACK SMR-02V-B


1
1
/PCL1H
2
2
24V

SMP-03V-NC
SMR-03V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
N.C
3
3
/PSRSOL

1
2
3
PHNR-3-H

HARNESS GUIDE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

4
3
2
1

MAIN FRAME

PHNR-15-H

PHNR-4-H

BU04P-TR-P-H
/HPIN
N.C
DGND
PULL UP

PHNR-4-H

1
2
3
4

PHNR-15-H

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

BU15P-TR-P-H
24V
/HPSOL
HPTRAY1
DGND
HPTRAY2
DGND
HPSIZE1
DGND
PULL UP
HPSIZE2
DGND
PULL UP
3.3V
HPWS
DGND

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

DGND
/PIN
5V
/PAP1H
N.C
/LUD1H

B 6B-PH-K-S

SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
24V
2
2
/PCS1H

<PAPER PATH SENSOR>


<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>

<TRAY SENSOR PWB>

<PAPER FEED SOLENOID>

<CASETTE SENSOR SW (TRAY DETECTION)>

[1st TRAY UNIT]

<HAND PAPER
EMPTY SENSOR PWB>

VHPSG2481++-1

<HAND PAPER IN
SENSOR PWB>

VHPSG2481++-1

292250-3
1
/HPEMPTY
2
DGND
3
PULL UP

292250-3
1
/HPIN
2
DGND
3
PULL UP

[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]

<PAPER FEED CLUCH>

/LUM1H
N.C
PGND

B 3B-PH-K-S

<DUPLEX 2 SENSOR PWB>

<PAPER STOP ROLLER CLUCH>

DGND
DUP2SEN
PULL UP

<HAND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR>

<HAND PAPER SIZE SENSOR 2>

<HAND PAPER PICK SIZE SENSOR 1>

<HAND PAPER TRAY 2>

<HAND PAPER TRAY 1>

LIFT UP MOTORUN PLATE

1
2
3

S 3B-PH-K-S

3.3V
HPWS
DGND

292250-2
1
CSS1H
2
DGND

1
2
3

S 3B-PH-K-S

292250-3
1
HPSIZE2
2
DGND
3
PULL UP

292250-3
1
HPSIZE1
2
DGND
3
PULL UP

292250-2
1
HPTRAY2
2
DGND

292250-2
1
HPTRAY1
2
DGND

<HAND PAPER
SOLENOID>

[HAND PAPER (MANUAL FEED) UNIT]


SMP-02V-NC
SMR-02V-N
1
1
24V
2
2
/HPSOL

C. Manual feed, 1st tray unit section


[1st TRAY UNIT]

CN38(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS1A#
6
LUM1A#
7
TRCLA#
8
PCL1A#
9
PCS2#
10
LUM2#
11
PCL2#
12
Y1B
13
LUM1B#
14
Y2
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCLB#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS1B#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL1B#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y1A
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND

CN5(B28B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
PCS2#
6
LUM2#
7
TRCL2#
8
PCL2#
9
PCS4#
10
LUM4#
11
PCL4#
12
Y3
13
LUM3#
14
Y4
15
CSSELA#
16
TRCL3#
17
CSSELB#
18
PCS3#
19
CSSELC#
20
PCL3#
21
AI#
22
BI#
23
/AI#
24
/BI#
25
Y2
26
OPCASSEL#
27
DGND
28
DGND

CN9(B24B-PUDSS-1)
1
PGND
2
24V
3
5V
4
24V
5
LUM4#
6
PCS4#
7
Y3
8
PCL4#
9
Y4
10
LUM3#
11
TRCL3#
12
CSSELA#
13
PCS3#
14
CSSELB#
15
PCL3#
16
CSSELC#
17
BI#
18
AI#
19
/BI#
20
/AI#
21
OPCASSEL#
22
DGND
23
DGND
24
DGND

Standard Tray I/F PWB

MCU PWB

D. 2nd tray unit section

Option Tray I/F PWB

[2nd TRAY UNIT]


CN3(B3B-PH-K-S)
/PCL2
N.C
24V

1
2
3

CN2(B3B-PH-K-K) Black
1
/TRCL2
2
N.C
3
24V

<PAPER FEED CL>

<VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER CL>

(N.C)

TRAY SENSOR PWB


CN8(B8B-PH-K-S)
DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2
/PCS2
24V

B 6B-PH-K-S

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CN7(B3B-PH-K-E) Blue
1
CSS2
2
N.C
3
DGND

CN1(B3B-PH-K-R) Red
1
LUM2D
2
N.C
3
PGND

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 5

1
2
3
4
5
6

B 3B-PH-K-S

DGND
PPD2
5V
PAP2
DRS2
LUD2

DRS2
N.C
DGND

1
2
3

292250-2
1
DRS2
2
D-GND

<PAPER PATH SENSOR>


<PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
SMR-02V-N
SMP-02V-NC
1
1
/PCS2
<PAPER
2
2
24V

292250-2
1
CSS2
2
DGND

FEED SL>

<TRAY SENSOR SW>

B 3B-PH-K-S

1
2
3

LUM2D
N.C
PGND

<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
SENSOR SW>

[LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 6

THERMOSTAT 2

3
2
1

RHNR-4-H

4
3
2
1

RHNR-3-H

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VLP-03V
VLR-03V
1
LIVE2
1
2
N.C
2
3
HL-OUTPUT2
3

VLP-02V
VLR-02V
1
LIVE1
1
2
HL-OUTPUT1
2

HARNESS GUIDE

HEATER LAMP 2 (SIDE)

BU04P-TR-P-H
RTH1
DGND
RTH2
DGND

BU03P-TR-P-H
5V(PullUp)
DGND
PDPX

CN6(B2P3-VH)
1
HL-OUTPUT1
2
N.C
3
HL-OUTPUT2

CN5(B2P-VL)
1
LIVE1
2
LIVE2

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

(N.C)

1
2
3

CN3(B03P-VL-B)
AC-LIVE IN
N.C
AC-NEUT IN

FGND

CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL

FGND

CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE
N.C
NEUTRAL

1
2
3

1
2
3

CN102(B3B-PH-K-S)
1
/PSFAN
2
N.C
3
GND

3
2
1

CN2(B03P-VL-R)
AC-NEUT OUT
N.C
AC-LIVE OUT

CN401(B2P-VH_RD_Red)
1
DVBS
2
GND

CN301(B2P-VH_BK_Black)
1
DHV
2
N.C

#187(B201)[WH]
THV

CN101(B2P-VH_White)
1
GB
2
N.C

CN21(B2P-VH_BL_Blue)
1
MCCASE
2
N.C

#187(B1)[RD]
MHV

LVPS PWB (1/2)

LVPS PWB (2/2)

CN101(B30B-PNDZS-1)
1
+12V
3
Sub3.3V
5
+3.3V
7
+3.3V
9
+5V
11
D-GND
13
D-GND
19
D-GND
21
+24V
23
P-GND
25
/PR
27
FW
29
P-OFF
2
Sub5V
4
Sub3.3V
6
+3.3V
8
+5V
10
D-GND
12
D-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
18
+24VINT
20
+24VINT
22
P-GND
28
HLOUT2
30
HLOUT1
15
D-GND
17
D-GND
24
P-GND
26
FAN-C

CN1(B11B-PH-K-S)
9
DGND
11
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM
6
THV-REM
8
DVBSPWM
1
MHVREM
5
THVREM
2
GBPWM
7
DVBSREM
10
N.C

CN20(B10B-PH-K-S)
1
24VOP
2
24VOP
3
24VOP
4
+3.3V
5
+5V
6
D-GND
7
D-GND
8
P-GND
9
P-GND
10
P-GND

HV PWB

HEATER LAMP 1 (CENTER)

THERMOSTAT 1

THERMISTER 2

RHNR-4-H

1
2
3
4

RHNR-3-H

1
2
3

MCU PWB

THERMISTER 1

292250-3
5V(PullUp)
3
DGND
2
PDPX
1

DGND
RTH2
DGND
RTH1
PDPX
DGND
5V(PullUp)

<DUPLEX PAPER OUT SENSOR>

[FUSING UNIT]

CN19(S7B-PH-K-S)

CN10(B30B-PUDSS-1)
11
24V1
5
P-GND
14
D-GND
16
D-GND
21
+12V
28
3.3Vsub
22
+3.3V
20
+3.3V
18
+5V
30
D-GND
26
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
+24V
8
P-GND
9
/PR
13
FW
15
POFFR#
25
5Vsub
27
3.3Vsub
24
+3.3V
17
+5V
29
D-GND
23
D-GND
19
D-GND
1
D-GND
6
+24VINT
4
+24VINT
7
P-GND
12
HLOUT2
10
HLOUT1

CN12(B10B-PASK-1)
1
DGND
2
SW24V
3
TCDA#
4
DHVREM/
5
THV-REM/
6
DVBSPWM/
7
MHVREM/
8
THVREM
9
GBPWM/
10
DVBSREM/

(N.C)
(N.C)

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

[POWER SUPPLY UNIT]

White

Brown

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

DHV

THV

GB

SOKET

White

Black

Black

White

200V only

PS-250-R (RED)
SW IN (LIVE)
PS-250-R (RED)
SW IN (NEUTRAL)

PS-250
SW OUT (NEUTRAL) 1
PS-250
SW OUT (LIVE)
1

<AC SW>

TC HIGH VOLTAGE
HOLDER

MCCASE

(To DV & LSU unit section)

MHV

E. Fusing unit, Power supply unit section

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 7

PM PWB

BPC

APC

/PMCLK
/PMRDY
/PMD
PGND
24V

177622-5

DGND
/SYNC
SW5V

B3B-PH-K-S

SW5V
/SYNC
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT#
DGND
LPSEL
SW5V
/SYNC
DGND

B10B-PH-K-S

LSU UNIT

2
1
3

1
2
3
4
5

3
2
1

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3
2
1

(TSHP-04V-K)

CRUM PWB

TCS

4
3
2
1

51010-0811
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

(To HV PWB)

DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP

BU03P-TR-P-H

PHNR-3-H

1
2
3

SW5V
/PMRDY
/VIDEO
/SAMP
APCSTT
DGND
LPSEL
/PMCLK
/SYNC
/PMD
PGND
24V

BU12P-TR-P-H

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PHNR-12-H

(THSR-04V-K)
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#

52025-0811
8
DVBS
7
N.C
6
DGND
5
DEV
4
N.C
3
N.C
2
TONER
1
24V

PHNR-3-H

3
2
1

SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND

SMR-03V-N
SMP-03V-NC
1
1
/PSFANOUT
3
3
PSFANRDY
2
2
PGND

<PAPER EXIT TRAY UNIT>

<PAPER EXIT TRAY SENSOR>

GP1S73P
DGND
TRAY PAPER
PULL UP

<PS FAN 2 (FRONT)>

<PS FAN 1 (SIDE)>

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-12-H

(N.C)

(N.C)
(N.C)
(N.C)

/PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY
PGND

DGND
DEV
TONER
24V
DGND
5V
DEVCLK#
DEVID#

CN501(B13B-PASK-1)
1
SW5V
2
DGND
3
/PMRDY
4
/VIDEO
5
/SAMP
6
APCSTT
7
DGND
8
LPSEL
9
/PMCLK
10
/SYNC
11
/PMD
12
PGND
13
24V

2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7

CN502(B14B-PUDSS-1)
10
OZNFANOUT
12
OZNFANRDY
14
PGND
13
DGND
11
TRAY PAPER
9
5V(PULL UP)

3
2
1

CN29(B6B-PH-K-S)
6
/PSFANOUT
5
PSFANRDY
4
PGND

1
2

CN3(B2P-VH)
TMD
/TMD

1
2
3

(N.C)

CN503(B4B-PH-K-S)
1
5V
2
EHUD#
3
DGND
4
ERTH

CN11(B4B-PH-K-K)BLACK
1
24V
2
/PREMSOL
3
N.C
(N.C)
4
DGND
(N.C)

CN18(B03P-VH)
24VINT
PGND
SW24V

CN504(B06B-CZHK-B-1)
6
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
5
4
PGND
3
/POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
2
1
PGND

5
4
3
2
1

CN8(B5B-PH-K-S)
SW24V
PGND
/MMD
/MMRDY
/MMCLK

1
2
3

1
2
3
4

5V
EHUD#
DGND
ERTH

(S4B-ZR-SM3A-TF)

SMP-02V-NC
1
24V
2
DGND

SMP-03V-NC
1
24VINT
2
N.C
3
SW24V

SMR-02V-N
1
2

ILSW

<INTERLOCK SW>

<SEPARATION PAWL SOLENOID>

Soldering
24VINT
Soldering
SW24V

<POUT FAN 2>

<POUT FAN 1>

<TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR>

only

SMR-03V-N
1
2
3

CK03-6H-P 31 CPM model


1
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
2
3
1
PGND

CK03-6H-P
3
POUTFANOUT
2
POUTFANRDY
1
PGND

<TONNER MOTOR>

<MAIN MOTOR>
(B5B-PH-K-S)
1
SW24V
2
PGND
3
/MMD
4
/MMRDY
5
/MMCLK

F. DV & LSU unit section

MCU PWB

CN**(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
1
24V
2
24V
3
5V
4
5V
5
3.3V
6
3.3V
7
/RESET
8
/PWOFF
9
/PRLINE
10
/HSYNC
11
GND
12
GND
13 /FAXPAGE
14
FAXCMD
15 /FAXCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
21
GDATA8
22
GDATA10
23
GDATA12
24
GDATA14
25
GND
26
/FAXPRD
27 /FAXACK1P
28
GND
29 /FAXACK0P
30
GND
31
24V
32
24V
33
5V
34
5Vsub
35
3.3V
36
3.3V
37
EXTRS
38
FAXWU
39
/SCLINE
40
/READY
41
GND
42
GND
43
/FAXDET
44
FAXSTS
45 /FAXSRDY
46
GND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
49
GDATA5
50
GDATA7
51
GDATA9
52
GDATA11
53
GDATA13
54
GDATA15
55
GND
56 /FAXREQ1P
57 /FAXCS1P
58 /FAXREQ0P
59 /FAXCS0P
60
GND

IMC PWB

Board to Board Connector

CN7(TX25-60P-12ST-H1E)
5V
1
5V
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
/MRESET
5
/PWOFF
6
/PRLINE
7
/HSYNC
8
DGND
9
DGND
10
DGND
11
N.C
12
/ESPAGE
13
ESCMD
14
/ESCRDY
15
DGND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
N.C
25
/ESACK1P 26
N.C
27
/ESPRD
28
/ESACK0P 29
DGND
30
5V
31
5V
32
3.3V
33
3.3V
34
N.C
35
N.C
36
/SCLINE
37
/READY
38
DGND
39
DGND
40
DGND
41
N.C
42
/ESDET
43
ESSTS
44
/ESSRDY
45
DGND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
N.C
55
/ESREQ1P 56
/ESCS1P
57
/ESREQ0P 58
/ESCS0P
59
DGND
60

MCU PWB

CN5(TX25-60R-12ST-H1E)
1
3.3VSub
2
3.3VSub
3
24V
4
DGND
5
DGND
6
/SCLINE
7
/READY
8
5V
9
GDATA1
10
GDATA3
11
GDATA5
12
GDATA7
13
GDATA9
14
GDATA11
15
GDATA13
16
GDATA15
17 /PRINTERWU
18
/PCLDET
19
PCLSTS
20 /PCLSRDY
21 /PCLREQ1P
22 /PCLCS1P
23 /PCLREQ0P
24 /PCLCS0P
25
/FAXDET
26
FAXSTS
27 /FAXSRDY
28 /FAXREQ0P
29 /FAXCS0P
30
3.3V
31
5Vsub
32
EXTRS
33
GND
34
GND
35
/MRESET
36
/PWOFF
37
/PRLINE
38
/HSYNC
39
/PSSTS
40
GDATA0
41
GDATA2
42
GDATA4
43
GDATA6
44
GDATA8
45
GDATA10
46
GDATA12
47
GDATA14
48
/FAXWU
49
/GDIDET
50
PCLCMD
51 /PCLCRDY
52
/PCLPRD
53 /PCLACK1P
54 /PCLACK0P
55 /FAXPAGE
56
FAXCMD
57 /FAXCRDY
58
/FAXPRD
59 /FAXACK0P
60
3.3V

CN9(B3B-PH-K-S)
SP+
1
SP2
N.C
3

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 8

SPEAKER

FAX PWB

CN1(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
24V
1
24V
2
5V
3
5V
4
3.3V
5
3.3V
6
/RESET
7
/PWOFF
8
/PRLINE
9
/HSYNC
10
GND
11
GND
12
/FAXPAGE 13
FAXCMD
14
/FAXCRDY 15
GND
16
GDATA0
17
GDATA2
18
GDATA4
19
GDATA6
20
GDATA8
21
GDATA10
22
GDATA12
23
GDATA14
24
GND
25
/FAXPRD
26
/FAXACK1P 27
GND
28
/FAXACK0P 29
GND
30
24V
31
24V
32
5V
33
5Vsub
34
3.3V
35
3.3V
36
EXTRS
37
FAXWU
38
/SCLINE
39
/READY
40
GND
41
GND
42
/FAXDET
43
FAXSTS
44
/FAXSRDY 45
GND
46
GDATA1
47
GDATA3
48
GDATA5
49
GDATA7
50
GDATA9
51
GDATA11
52
GDATA13
53
GDATA15
54
GND
55
/FAXREQ1P 56
/FAXCS1P 57
/FAXREQ0P 58
/FAXCS0P 59
GND
60

Board to Board Connector

MOTHER PWB

CN**(TX25-60P-12ST-H1)
1
5Vsub
2
5Vsub
3
3.3Vsub
4
3.3Vsub
/RESET
5
/PWOFF
6
7
/PRLINE
8
/HSYNC
9
GND
10
GND
11
GND
12
GND
13 /PCLPAGE
14
PCLCMD
15 /PCLCRDY
16
GND
17
GDATA0
18
GDATA2
19
GDATA4
20
GDATA6
GDATA8
21
22
GDATA10
23
GDATA12
24
GDATA14
GND
25
/PCLPRD
26
27 /PCLACK1P
GND
28
29 /PCLACK0P
GND
30
31
5Vsub
32
5Vsub
33
3.3Vsub
34
3.3V
35 /PRINTWU
36
PSSTS
37
/SCLINE
38
/READY
39
GND
40
GND
41
GND
42
NC
43
/PCLDET
44
PCLSTS
45 /PCLSRDY
46
GND
47
GDATA1
48
GDATA3
49
GDATA5
50
GDATA7
51
GDATA9
52
GDATA11
53
GDATA13
54
GDATA15
55
GND
56 /PCLREQ1P
57 /PCLCS1P
58 /PCLREQ0P
59 /PCLCS0P
60
GND

CN3(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)
3.3VSub
1
3.3VSub
2
24V
3
DGND
4
DGND
5
/SCLINE
6
/READY
7
5V
8
GDATA1
9
GDATA3
10
GDATA5
11
GDATA7
12
GDATA9
13
GDATA11
14
GDATA13
15
GDATA15
16
/PRINTERWU 17
/PCLDET
18
PCLSTS 19
/PCLSRDY 20
/PCLREQ1P 21
/PCLCS1P 22
/PCLREQ0P 23
/PCLCS0P 24
/FAXDET
25
FAXSTS
26
/FAXSRDY 27
/FAXREQ0P 28
/FAXCS0P 29
3.3V
30
5Vsub
31
EXTRS
32
GND
33
GND
34
/MRESET
35
/PWOFF
36
/PRLINE
37
/HSYNC
38
/PSSTS
39
GDATA0
40
GDATA2
41
GDATA4
42
GDATA6
43
GDATA8
44
GDATA10
45
GDATA12
46
GDATA14
47
/FAXWU
48
/GDIDET
49
PCLCMD
50
/PCLCRDY 51
/PCLPRD
52
/PCLACK1P 53
/PCLACK0P 54
/FAXPAGE 55
FAXCMD
56
/FAXCRDY 57
/FAXPRD
58
/FAXACK0P 59
3.3V
60

Board to Board Connector

Board to Board Connector

SPCL PWB

G. Board to board section

3. Signal list
Signal name

Name

CL

Copy lamp

CLH

RSPF clutch

COVER
CSS1

RSPF cover open/close


detection
Tray 1 installation detection

CSS2

Tray 2 installation detection

CSS3

Tray 3 installation detection

CSS4

Tray 4 installation detection

DPX

Duplex motor

DRS2

DUP2SEN

Door open/close detection


(Tray 2)
Door open/close detection
(Tray 3)
Door open/close detection
(Tray 4)
DUP2 paper delivery sensor

EHUD

Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the
copy lamp.
Controls ON/OFF of the
RSPF paper feed roller.
Detects open/close of
the RSPF cover.
Detects installation of
tray 1.
Detects installation of
tray 2.
Detects installation of
tray 3.
Detects installation of
tray 4.
Controls the duplex
motor.
Detects door open/close.

Connector level
L
H
ON
OFF

Connector
No.
CN26

Pin No.

PWB name

MCU
RSPF
interface
RSPF
interface
MCU

ON

OFF

CN5

13

OPEN

CLOSE

CN5

NO

YES

CN15

22

NO

YES

CN7

NO

YES

CN7

NO

YES

CN4

CN1

2,3,4,5

OPEN

CLOSE

CN8

Detects door open/close.

OPEN

CLOSE

CN8

Detects door open/close.

OPEN

CLOSE

CN4

YES

NO

CN15

12

Humidity sensor

Detects paper delivery in


the reverse path.
Senses the humidity.

Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

CN503

MCU

ERTH

Temperature sensor

Senses the temperature.

CN503

MCU

GSOL

Gate solenoid

ON

OFF

CN4

HLOUT1

Heater lamp main

OFF

ON

CN10

10

RSPF
interface
MCU

HLOUT2

Heater lamp sub

OFF

ON

CN10

12

MCU

HPEMPTY

Manual feed paper presence


detection

YES

NO

CN15

16

MCU

HPIN

Manual feed paper entry


detection
Manual feed paper length
detection
Manual feed paper size
detection
(Longitudinal direction)
Manual paper feed solenoid

Reverses the paper exit


gate in ON operation.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp main.
Turns ON/OFF the
heater lamp sub.
Detects presence of
paper for manual paper
feed.
Detects paper entry for
manual feed.
Detects the length of
manual feed paper.
Detects the size of
manual feed paper.
(longitudinal direction)
Controls the manual
paper feed solenoid.
Detects the length of
manual feed tray paper.
Detects the length of
manual feed tray paper.
Detects the width of
manual feed paper.
Drives the right paper
exit gate solenoid.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
Detects the upper limit of
the lift-up motor.
Drives the lift plate of the
paper tray.

NO

YES

CN15

26

MCU

NO

YES

CN15

17

MCU

NO

YES

CN15

23

MCU

ON

OFF

CN15

MCU

LONG

SHORT

CN15

MCU

SHORT

LONG

CN15

13

MCU

CN15

31

MCU

ON

OFF

CN17

8,9

MCU

Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
OFF

Detected

CN14

MCU

Detected

CN8

Detected

CN8

Detected

CN4

ON

CN15

Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

DRS3
DRS4

HPSIZE1
HPSIZE2

HPSOL
HPTRAY1
HPTRAY2
HPWS
KEEPSOL
LUD1H
LUD2
LUD3
LUD4
LUM1H

Manual paper feed tray


length detection
Manual paper feed tray
length detection
Manual feed paper width
detection
Right paper exit gate
solenoid
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection (Tray 2)
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection (Tray 3)
Lift-up motor upper limit
detection (Tray 4)
Lift-up motor

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 9

NOTE

Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

Analog
detection
Analog
detection

Signal name

Name

Function/Operation

LUM2D

Lift-up motor

Drives the lift plate of the


paper tray.
Drives the lift plate of the
paper tray.
Drives the lift plate of the
paper tray.
Corrects the initial
position of the scanner.

LUM3D

Lift-up motor

LUM4D

Lift-up motor

MHP

Mirror home position sensor

MIRMOD

Mirror motor

MMD
MMRDY

Main motor
Main motor lock

OCCOVER
OZNFANOUT
PAP1H
PAP2

OC cover open/close
detection
Ozone fan
Paper pass sensor (Tray 1)
Paper pass sensor (Tray 2)

Controls the mirror


operation.
Controls the main motor.
Detects lock of the main
motor.
Detects open/close of
the OC cover.
Controls the ozone fan.
Detects paper pass.
Detects paper pass.

PAP3

Paper pass sensor (Tray 3)

PAP4

Connector level
L
H
OFF
ON

Connector
No.
CN1

Pin No.
1

PWB name
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

OFF

ON

CN1

OFF

ON

CN4

14

Other
than
home
position.

Home
position

CN23

33

CN906

1,2,3,4

ON
Rotation

OFF
Lock

IC215
IC215

3
2

MCU
MCU

OPEN

CLOSE

CN23

29

MCU

OFF
YES
YES

ON
NO
NO

CN502
CN14
CN8

10
6
4

Detects paper pass.

YES

NO

CN8

Paper pass sensor (Tray 4)

Detects paper pass.

YES

NO

CN4

PAPER

Paper entry sensor

Detects paper entry.

YES

NO

CN5

18

PCL1H

Paper feed clutch (Tray 1)

ON

OFF

CN15

PCL2

Paper feed clutch (Tray 2)

ON

OFF

CN3

PCL3

Paper feed clutch (Tray 3)

ON

OFF

CN3

PCL4

Paper feed clutch (Tray 4)

ON

OFF

CN4

10

PCS1H

Paper feed solenoid (Tray 1)

ON

OFF

CN14

PCS2

Paper feed solenoid (Tray 2)

ON

OFF

CN8

PCS3

Paper feed solenoid (Tray 3)

ON

OFF

CN8

PCS4

Paper feed solenoid (Tray 4)

ON

OFF

CN4

12

PDPX

Duplex sensor

YES

NO

CN19

Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

PFULL2

No. 2 paper exit full sensor

YES

NO

CN21

MCU

PFULL2_R

Right paper exit full sensor

YES

NO

CN17

MCU

PGSOL

Paper exit gate solenoid

ON

OFF

CN22

2,3

MCU

PIN
POUT1

Paper entry sensor


No. 1 paper exit sensor

YES
NO

NO
YES

CN14
CN32

4
6

MCU
MCU

POUT2

No. 2 paper exit sensor

YES

NO

CN21

MCU

POUT2_R

Right paper exit sensor

YES

NO

CN17

MCU

POUTCOV

Paper exit cover open/close


detection
Paper exit cooling fan
Paper exit cooling fan lock
detection
Paper pass sensor (Tray 2)

Controls ON/OFF of the


paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
paper feed roller.
Detects paper presence
for duplex.
Detects paper full in the
No. 2 paper exit unit.
Detects paper full in the
right paper exit unit.
Controls the paper exit
gate.
Detects paper entry.
Detects paper exit of the
No. 1 paper exit unit.
Detects paper exit of the
No. 2 paper exit unit.
Detects paper exit of the
right paper exit unit.
Detects open/close of
the paper exit cover.
Cools the fusing unit.
Detects lock of the paper
exit cooling fan.
Detects paper pass.

MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface
MCU

OPEN

CLOSE

CN21

10

MCU

OFF
Rotation

ON
Lock

CN504
CN504

3,6
2,5

MCU
MCU

YES

NO

CN8

POUTFANOUT
POUTFANRDY
PPD2

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 10

OP I/F PWB

Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

Standard
tray I/F

NOTE

PPD3

Paper pass sensor (Tray 3)

Detects paper pass.

Connector level
L
H
YES
NO

PPD4

Paper pass sensor (Tray 4)

Detects paper pass.

YES

NO

CN4

PREMSOL

Paper separation solenoid

ON

OFF

CN11

PSFANOUT
PSFANRDY

PS fan
PS fan lock detection

OFF
Rotation

ON
Lock

CN29
CN29

3,6
2,5

MCU
MCU

PSOL

PS solenoid

ON

OFF

CN5

11

PSRSOL
RSOL

Resist roller solenoid


Reverse solenoid

Controls the paper


separation solenoid.
Drives the PS fan.
Detects lock of the PS
fan.
Controls ON/OFF of the
PS roller.
Controls the resist roller.
Reverses the paper exit
gate in ON operation.

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

CN15
CN5

4
15

RTH1

Thermister 1

CN19

SPF
interface
MCU
SPF
interface
PWB
MCU

RTH2

Thermister 2

CN19

MCU

SFTD
SFTHP

Shifter motor
Shifter home position sensor

Home
position

CN2
CN32

3,4,5,6
4

MCU
MCU

SPFOPEN

SPF cover open/close


sensor
SPF paper exit sensor

Other
than
home
position.
OPEN

CLOSE

CN5

24

YES

NO

CN3

CN2

OFF
Rotation

ON
Lock

CN32
CN32

10,12
14,16

CN3
CN502

1,2
6

ON

OFF

CN2

ON

OFF

CN2

YES

NO

CN5

Signal name

SPFOUT
SPFWS

Name

TFANOUT
TFANRDY

SPF document width


detection
Fusing fan
Fusing fan lock detection

TMD
TONER

Toner motor
Toner sensor

TRCL2

Vertical transport clutch

TRCL3

Vertical transport clutch

W0

Paper empty sensor

Function/Operation

Detects the fusing


temperature.
Detects the fusing
temperature.
Offsets paper.
Detects the home
position of the shifter.

Detects open/close of
the SPF cover.
Detects paper exit of the
SPF.
Detects SFP documents.
Drives the fusing fan.
Detects lock of the fusing
fan.
Controls the toner motor.
Detects the toner
density.
Controls ON/OFF of the
vertical transport roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the
vertical transport clutch.
Detects paper empty.

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 11

Connector
No.
CN8

Pin No.
2

PWB name

NOTE

Option tray
I/F
Option tray
I/F
MCU

SPF
interface
SPF
interface
SPF
interface
MCU
MCU
MCU
MCU
Standard
tray I/F
Option tray
I/F
SPF
interface

Analog
detection

Analog
detection

PARTS GUIDE
CODE:00ZMXM310P002

Digital Multifunction System

Revised Edition

MX-M260/N/FG/FP
MX-M310/N/FG/FP
AR-5726/5731
MX-VR10
MX-RP10
MX-TR11

(Except North America,


Japan,Argentina)
(North America, Japan,
Argentina is standard)

MODEL

(Japan is standard)

CONTENTS
1 1(Exteriors 1)
2 2(Exteriors 2)
3 (Operation panel unit)
4 (Frame section)
5 (Lamp unit)
6 1(Optical frame 1)
7 2(Optical frame 2)
8 (Middle frame section)
9 550 (550 cassette unit)
F (Paper feed section)
G (Paper transfer section)
H (Side door unit)
I
(Multi manual paper feed tray unit)

J (Multi manual paper feed unit)


K DV (DV unit)
L (Process unit)
M 1(Fusing unit 1)
N 2(Fusing unit 2)
O (Drive unit)
P 1(1st delivery paper unit 1)
Q 2(1st delivery paper unit 2)
R (PWB section)
S (Rear frame section)

T 2nd (2nd exteriors)


U 2nd 550 (2nd 550 cassette unit)
V 2nd (2nd paper feed section)
W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)
X 2nd (2nd drive section)
Y (Lift up unit)
Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 RSPF Exteriors 1)
[ MX-RP10 2 (MX-RP10 RSPF Exteriors 2)
\ MX-RP10
(MX-RP10 RSPF Paper feeding section)

] MX-RP10 1
(MX-RP10 RSPF Transport section 1)

^ MX-RP10 2
(MX-RP10 RSPF Transport section 2)

_ MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)

` MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)

a
(Packing material & accessories)

b MX-VR10
(MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories

MX-RP10
(MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)

d MX-TR11
(MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)

SHARP CORPORATION

This document has been published to be used for


after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.

< >
No1 6
< >
1

(a,b,c)
(a,b,c)

< >

R/C
< >

R/ C

<Note for use of the revised Parts Guide>


Interchangeability of parts is expressed by No1~6 as shown in the table below.
<Interchangeability>
1

Interchangeable.

Current type can be used in place of new type.


New type cannot be used in place of current type.

Current type cannot be used in place of new type.


New type can be used in place of current type.

Not interchangeable.

Interchangeable if replaced with same types of releted parts in use.

Others.

New & Addition, Change, Abolition, and Quantity change are expressed with the marks shown in the
table below.
<Change of Division>
New & Addition
Change
Abolition
Q'uantity (increase) /Others
Q'uantity (decrease)
Correction

Running Change of Effective Time is expressed as R/C.


<Effective Time>
R/ C

Running Change

1
Update : 2009/11/16

A :
B :
E :
D :
C :

DEFINITION
Rank
Rank
Rank
Rank
Rank

A
B
E
D
C

:
:
:
:
:

Maintenance parts, and consumable parts which are not included in but closely related to maintenance parts
Performance/function parts (sensors, clutches, and other electrical parts), consumable parts
Unit parts including PWB
Preparation parts (External fitting, packing, parts packed together)
Parts other than the above (excluding sub components of PWB)

Because parts marked with "!" is indispensable for the machine safety maintenance and operation, it must be replaced with
the parts specific to the product specification.
F
F
F
F

( )

Other than this Parts Guide, please refer to documents Service Manual (including Circuit Diagram)of this model.
Please use the 13 digit code described in the right hand corner of front cover of the document, when you place an order.
For U.S. only-Use order codes provided in advertising literature. Do not order from parts department.

Maintenance parts for which the periodic replacement is necessary.

1 1(Exteriors 1)
NO.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

GCAB-0081QST1
GCAB-0080QST1
CFIX-0013QS11
CFIX-0013QS12
PSHEZ0220QSZ1
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
GCAB-0084QST1
CGIDM0116QS05
CGIDM0116QS04

AL
AM
AM
AL
AK
AA
AS
AK
AH

EB
EG
EG
EB
DX
DD
EQ
DX
DX

D
D
D
D
C
C
D
C
C

LFIX-0011QSAC

AK

DX

11

PGLSP0003QSZZ

BA

FX

17

LFIX-0012QSAC

AH

DX

18

PSHEZ0221QSZZ

AC

DJ

19

PGLSP0004QSZZ

AX

FG

20

PSHEZ0207QSZZ

AC

DJ

21

PSHEZ0222QSZZ

AC

DJ

22

PCUSS0011QSZZ

AB

DJ

23

PSHEZ0208QSZZ

AC

DJ

24

PCUSS0027QSZZ

AA

DJ

25
26

PSHEZ0088QSZ2
PMLT-0093QSZZ

AD
AB

DJ
DJ

C
C

27

PSHEZ0474QSZZ

AD

DJ

501

CFIX-0012RS54

AU

EZ

TR No.

DESCRIPTION
Optical left cabinet
Optical right cabinet
Glass fixing plate
(Except Japan)
Glass fixing plate
(Japan)
Shading sheet
Screw(38)
Rear cabinet upper
OR guide unit
(Except Japan)
OR guide unit
(Japan)
OC fixing glass
(Except North America,Japan,Argentina)
Table glass
SPF fixing glass
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
White revise sheet LPD
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
SPF slit glass
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
SPF glass sheet F
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
Glass fixing sheet
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
Glass cushion
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
Glass sheet R
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
Glass cushion C
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
Table glass sheet
[Missing parts code]
Rear cabinet upper cushion
Glass fixing sheet
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]
SPF Glass fixing unit
[MX-RP10,North America,Japan,Argentina]

Effective
time

OR
OR
OC

SPF
LPD
SPF
SPF F

R
C

SPF

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

1 1(Exteriors 1)
5

1
5

3
7
5

6
5
5

25

5
11

26

5
8

Original cover only

501
23
17
18

27
19
20

22
24

SPF only

PRP03901

21

22

3
Update : 2009/11/16

2 2(Exteriors 2)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

3
4

GCAB-0042QSTF
GCAB-0042QSTG
XHBS730P08000
GCAB-0145QSZZ

AP
AP
AB
AU

EQ
EQ
DD
EZ

D
D
C
C

GCOV-0056QST1

AG

DS

24

GCAB-0043QSTC
GCAB-0152QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
GCAB-0085QST5
GCAB-0085QST6
GCAB-0085QST6
GCOV-0034QSTC
PCOVP0130QSZZ
MSPRD0189QSZZ
MLEVP0069QSTZ
GDOR-0003QST7
NROLP1060FCZZ
MSPRT0229GCAZ
GCAB-0039QSTC
GCOV-0043QST2
PFILZ0016QSZZ
GCOV-0086QSZZ
GCAB-0149QSZZ
GCAB-0149QSZ1
GCAB-0142QSZZ
GCAB-0148QSZZ
GCAB-0148QSZ1

AM
AM
AA
AY
AY
AY
AK
AM
AB
AD
AP
AF
AC
AS
AX
AS
AN
AV
AV
AL
AW
AW

EG
EG
DD
FQ
FG
FG
DX
EG
DJ
DJ
EQ
DS
DJ
EZ
FG
EQ
EG
FG
FG
EB
FG
FG

D
D
C
D
D
D
C
D
C
C
D
C
C
D
D
B
C
C
C
C
C
C

25

LBNDZ0007QSZZ

AC

DJ

26

GCAB-0141QSZZ

AT

EZ

27

TLABZ5148FCZZ

AC

DJ

37
39

44
49
50
52

LX-BZ0082QSPZ
TCAUA1069FCZZ
TLABZ0793QSZZ
TLABG5005FCZZ
TLABH0483QSZZ
MARMP0050QSZZ
GCOVH0024QST2
TLABH5200FCZZ

AA
AC
AC
AC
AC
AF
AE
AB

DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DS
DJ

C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

53

TCAUH1071FCZZ

BC

GD

54

TLABZ5048FCZZ

AB

DJ

63

PSHEZ0568QSZZ
PSHEZ0568QSZZ
PCOVP0142QSZZ

AD
AD
AE

DJ
DJ
DS

C
C
C

65

GCAB-0144QSZZ

AK

DX

66
67

69
70
71

PCOVP0144QSZZ
HBDGD0058FCZZ
CBDGD0062FC35
CBDGD0062FC34
CBDGD0062FC39
CBDGD0062FC38
CBDGD0062FC42
CBDGD0062FC40
CBDGD0062FC43
CBDGD0062FC41
CBDGD0004QS01
CBDGD0004QS02
PBOX-0006QSZ1
XEBS730P10000
VHPGP1S73P+-18

AD
AT
AH
AH
AG
AG
AG
AG
AG
AG
AN
AN
AE
AC
AF

DJ
EQ
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
DX
EQ
EQ
DS
DD
DS

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
B

72

MLEVP0068QSTZ

AC

DJ

73

DHAI-0370QSPZ

AF

DS

74

GCAB-0143QSZZ

BA

FX

75

PSHEZ0392QSZ1

AB

DJ

79

TLABZ5059FCZZ

AB

DJ

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
23

40

61

68

DESCRIPTION
(Except Japan)
(Japan)

Rear cabinet lower


(100V Series)
Rear cabinet lower
(200V Series)
Screw(410)

Rear cabinet right


(Except Japan)
Rear cabinet right
(Except Japan)
Rear cabinet right
(Japan)
Rear cabinet memory cover

Delivery dummy cover


(Except Japan)
Right cabinet spring

Right cabinet lever


[Missing parts code]
Right cabinet door
[Missing parts code]
U-turn roller
U
FU spring R
FU R
Right cabinet
[Missing parts code]
Option PWB cover

Ozone filter

Delivery cover

Left cabinet
(Japan)
Left cabinet
[Missing parts code](Except Japan)
Front cabinet right

Right cabinet front

Right cabinet front


[Improve reliability]
Front cabinet band A2R

A2R
Front cabinet

Energy star label


[MX-M260(Except Argentina)
/M260FG/M260FP/M310(Except Argentina)
/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5726/5731(East Europe)]
Screw(38)

Service caution label


(Except Japan)
Class 1 label NEW
(Except North America,Japan) 1 NEW
Class 1 label JPN
(Japan) 1 JPN
Warm heater label
(Japan)
Paper fixing arm

FAX connector cover


(Japan) FAX
Plug caution label
(Japan) J
Service caution label PO

(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe) PO
WEEE mark label [Germany,Switzerland,East Europe,
Europe,U.kingdom,AR-5726/5731] WEEE
R cabinet sheet

R cabinet sheet

Fan cover

Delivery tray joint cabinet

R cabinet lever cover


(Except Japan)
Front cabinet badge
[MX-M Series]
Model name plate
[MX-M260]
Model name plate
[MX-M310]
Model name plate
[MX-M260N]
Model name plate
[MX-M310N]
Model name plate
[MX-M260FP]
Model name plate
[MX-M310FP]
Model name plate
[MX-M260FG]
Model name plate
[MX-M310FG]
Model name plate
[AR-5726]
Model name plate
[AR-5731]
Delivery sensor BOX

Screw(310)

Photo sensor(GP1S73P)

Delivery tray actuator

Delivery paper detect sensor harness

Delivery tray cabinet

Paper feed solenoid sound proof B

B
BM link label
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] BM

TR No.

Effective
time

Rear cabinet left


Rear cabinet left
Screw(38)
Delivery tray cabinet rear
Rear cabinet maintenance cover

09/10 R/C

1st lot
1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

09/08 Mid

09/11

Update : 2009/11/16

2 2(Exteriors 2)
54
37 52

50

9 7

3
37
53

40

3
37

19

39

17

3
3

21

75
12

11

44
18
7
63
7

74

14

15

14

73

66
7

71
72

24

69
61

70

3
7

16

65

79

13

15

49

23

67
68

26
25

10
7

27

PRP03902

5
Update : 2009/11/16

3 (Operation panel unit)


NO.

1
2
3

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PSHEZ0646QSPZ
XEBS730P08000
DHAI-0503QSPZ

AE
AC
AE

DJ
DD
DS

C
C
C

CPWBX0211QSF2

BR

LX

CPWBX0211QSF4
CPWBX0211QSF5

BR
BR

LX
LX

E
E

CPWBX0211QSF7

BR

LX

CPWBX0211QSF3
MSPRP3009FCZZ
LHLDZ0119QSZZ
VVL81HB1T03-A
LHLDZ0118QSZZ
PSHEZ5764FCZZ
HPNLH0264FCZZ

BR
AD
AK
BV
AL
AC
BF

LX
DJ
EB
RB
EB
DJ
GN

E
C
C
B
C
C
B

CPNLC0072QS05

AX

FG

AX

FG

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

KEY

11

CPNLC0072QS03

14

CPNLC0072QS04
PLNS-0016QSZZ

AX
AD

FG
DJ

C
B

CPNLC0070QS02

AR

EQ

PWB protect sheet


Screw(38)
KEY PWB harness
OPU PWB
(North America,Philippines,Thailand,
Indonesia,India,Special country,Malaysia,
Singapore,Argentina)
OPU PWB
(Europe,U.kingdom)
OPU PWB
(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe)
OPU PWB
(Algeria,Iran,Egypt,Syria,Tunisa,Nigeria,
West Africa,Morocco,Jordan,Lebanon,UAE,
Yemen,Oman,Qutar,Kuwait,Bahrain,Saudi Arabia)
OPU PWB
(Japan)
LCD earth plate
LCD holder B
LCD module
LCD holder
Touch panel sheet
Touch panel 8.1
Operation panel B EX (Except Germany,Switzerland,
East Europe,Japan)
Operation panel AS
[Missing parts code]
(Germany,Switzerland,East Europe)
Operation panel B J
(Japan)
FAX Lens
(Japan)
Operation panel 8.1 EX
(Except Japan)

CPNLC0070QS01
JBTN-0071QSA1
CBTN-0290FC01
CBTN-0292FC03
PFILW0319FCZZ
PLNS-0105FCZZ
CBTN-0291FC02
CBTN-0291FC01
JBTN-0284FCAZ
CPWBF0234QSE2
CPWBF0234QSE1
CPWBF0234QSE3
LDAIU0037QSZZ
QCNW-0249FCPZ
LDAIU0038QSZZ
LDAIU0038QSZ1
XEBS740P10000
LPLTP0499QSZZ
LPLTP0498QSZZ
CPNLH0073QS01
CPNLH0073QS02
CPNLH0073QS03
CPNLH0073QS04
CPNLH0073QS22
CPNLH0073QS23
CHLDZ0118RS51
(Unit)

AT
AR
AK
AR
AK
AC
AG
AG
AR
AX
AZ
AY
AS
AZ
AQ
AQ
AA
AD
AE
AZ
AP
AP
AS
AN
AZ
BX

EZ
EQ
DX
EQ
EB
DJ
DX
DX
EQ
FG
FX
FQ
EZ
FQ
EQ
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
FQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
FX
RR

C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E

Operation panel 8.1 J


(Japan)
Mode key
Ten key
Interrupt key
Copy key ring
Power supply key lens
CA key EX
(Except Japan)
CA key J
(Japan)
Copy key
Key PWB
(MX-M Series except Japan)
Key PWB
(Japan)
Key PWB
(AR-57 Series)
Operation base plate A
LCD-FFC P2
Operation base plate B
Operation base plate B
Screw(410)
Operation panel side plate left
Operation panel side plate right
Key sheet
[English for FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[English no FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[French for FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[French no FAX(MX-M Series)]
Key sheet
[English(AR-57 Series)]
Key sheet
[French(AR-57 Series)]
LCD unit
[Missing parts code]

AS
B J
FAX

A8.1EX
A8.1J

CA EX
CA J

KEY
KEY
KEY
A
LCD-FFC P2
B
B

LCD

CPNLC0070RS51

CC

UB

CPNLC0070RS53
CPNLC0070RS52
CPNLC0070RS54

CC
CC
CC

UB
UB
UB

E
E
E

Operation panel unit


[MX-M Series(North America,
Australia,New Zealand,Philippines,Thailand,
Indonesia,India,Special country)]
Operation panel unit [MX-M Series(Europe,U.kingdom)]
Operation panel unit
[MX-M260FP/M310FP]
Operation panel unit
[MX-M260FG/M310FG]

5
6
7
8
9
10

15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

32

501

901

Effective
time

OPU
OPU
OPU
OPU
OPU
LCD
LCD B
LCD
LCD

8.1
B EX
1st lot

09/08 mid

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

3 (Operation panel unit)

901

28

2
2

3
29
2

2
2

29

25

6
2

24

20
22
23

7
2

27

30

19

21

18
2

2
2
9
10

15
14

26

2
31
11

32
PRP03903

501

7
Update : 2009/10/16

4 (Frame section)
NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4
5

LPLTM0163QSZZ
XHBS730P08000
LPLTM0232QSZ2
CFRM-0043QS03
XEBS740P10000

CPLTM0529QS01

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

AK
AB
AU
AX
AA

EB
DD
EQ
FQ
DD

C
C
C
D
C

AG

DS

Left reinforce plate lower


Screw(38)
Frame reinforce plate R
Corner frame RL
Screw(310)
DUP drive idle plate And2 Ref

PSHEZ0507QSZZ

AA

DJ

Pulley flange sheet N

NPLYZ0036QSZZ

AD

DJ

DUP idle pulley TLPD

11
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
40
41

LDAI-0023QSTE
LHLDW1757FCPZ
XHBS740P10000
LPLTM0333QSZ2
XRESP40-06000
NBLTT0026QSZZ
LPLTM0165QSZ3
PCOVP0110QSZ1
LPLTM0166QSZZ
CFRM-0044QS03
LPLTM0251QSZ1
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
NKOM-0005QSZZ
XBPS730P08KS0
XHBS730P06000
LANGF0012QSZZ
XBBS740P06000
PSHEZ0333QSZZ
PSHEZ0325QSZZ

BG
AC
AA
AX
AA
AF
AS
AE
AC
BB
AE
AF
AC
AB
AC
AF
AA
AC
AB

GT
DJ
DD
FG
DD
DS
EZ
DJ
DJ
FX
DS
DS
DJ
DD
DD
DS
DD
DJ
DJ

D
C
C
C
C
B
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

42

CPLTM0342QS01

AH

DX

Base plate
Wire saddle(HL-18-0)
Screw(410)
Frame reinforce plate F
E type ring(E4)
DUP drive belt
Front reinforce plate
Interlock cover
Front support adjusting plate
Right frame unit
PS earth plate
Cassette collar shaft
Cassette guide collar
Screw(38KS)
Screw(36)
Right reinforce angle
Screw(46)
PS front sheet
Frame lower sheet
DU motor fixing plate ASSY

43

NGERH0174QSZ1

AD

DJ

DUP drive gear TLPD

44

RMOTS0056QSP1

BD

GJ

45

NBLTT0038QSZZ

AF

DS

DUP reverse motor


DUP drive belt TL

46

LPLTM0332QSZZ

AE

DJ

47

LPLTM0495QSZZ

AE

DJ

48
55
56
61

XEBS740P12000
PMLT-0091QSZ1
PGSK-0044QSPZ
NPLYZ0015QSZZ

AA
AD
AH
AC

DD
DJ
DX
DJ

C
C
C
C

62

MSPRC1315FCZ1

AD

DJ

63
64
65
66
67
68
69

NGERH0066QSZZ
PSHEZ0432QSZZ
LBSHC0009QSPZ
LHLDW1009ACZZ
PSHEZ0448QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
XBPS730P30KS0

AD
AA
AC
AA
AA
AP
AC

DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
EQ
DD

C
C
C
C
C
B
C

70

CPLTM0530QS01

AF

DS

1 way gear(17T)
PS front sheet 2
Edge bush(CE-012 L15)
Clamp(UAMS-05S-2)
Optical bottom sheet And
Fan motor ANR2
Screw(330KS)
DUP drive rotation plate And2 Ref [Missing parts code]

[Missing parts code]

(Japan)
(Japan)

[Missing parts code]

Fusing unit earth plate


Power supply switch fixing plate And2 Ref
Screw(412)
Right frame cushion A
OP holder cushion
[Except MX-M310FG]
Pulley(S2M20T)
Manual paper feed clutch spring A

71

MSPRT0147QSZZ

AC

DJ

Stopper arm spring

72

LX-BZ0852FCZZ

AC

DD

Step screw

R
RL

DUP
And2 Ref

N
DUP
TLPD

F
E
DUP

PS

PS

DU

DUP
TLPD
DUP
DUP
TL

And2 Ref

A
OP

A
1
PS 2

And
ANR2

DUP
And2 Ref

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

4 (Frame section)
15
56

3
1
2
5
68

15

2
42 44

5
15
14

67

20

69 16
5

67

15

47

15 29
46
5
5

26
25
15
15

48

18
45

64

22

27

40

23

28
65

11

66

24
15

43

55

30
2

5
6

64
5

71

21
2

41

7 9

19

7
72

18
70
7 72
61

18
63

62

PRP03904

9
Update : 2009/11/16

5 (Lamp unit)
NO.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
901

PARTS CODE
PREFL0004QSZZ
RLMPU0012QSZZ
LHLDZ0047QSZ3
MSLI-0138FCZZ
PCUSU0203FCZZ
MSPRP0145QSZZ
PMIR-0009QSZZ
DUNTK0034QSP3
DHAI-0200QSZZ
LFIX-0009QSZZ
PCUSS0033QSZZ
XEBS830P06000
LPLTM4715FCZ1
TCAUH0933FCZZ
XEPS830P06K00
XEPS830P08K00
(Unit)
CREFL0004QS38

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

Effective
time

AP
BG
AW
AC
AE
AF
AS
BK
AS
AF
AC
AB
AF
AB
AC
AC

EQ
GT
FG
DJ
DS
DS
EQ
HC
EZ
DS
DJ
DD
DS
DD
DD
DD

B
B
C
C
C
C
B
E
C
D
C
C
C
D
C
C

Reflector
Lamp
Base
Slider
Protection cushion
Mirror spring
1st mirror
Inverter unit
CL harness
Harness fixing
Mirror cushion
Screw(36)
Wire fixing plate F
High temperature caution label
Screw(36K)
Screw(38K)

1st

CL

[Missing parts code] (36K)


[Missing parts code] (38K)

1st lot
1st lot

BR

MJ

Copy lamp unit

[Missing parts code]

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

5 (Lamp unit)
16

1
16
4

2
3
17

5
4
14
6
7

12

12
9

15
8
12

10
12

11
5

6
4

14

12

12

PRP03905

12

10

11
Update : 2009/11/16

6 1(Optical frame 1)
NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

PWIR-0006QSPZ
CDAIU0012QS15
NPLYZ0016QSZZ
NPLYZ0006QSZ1
XRESP40-05000
PWIR-0005QSP1
CMIR-0008QS36
CREFL0004QS38
XBPS740P06K00
LHLDZ0056QSZZ
LX-BZ0004QSPZ
LRALM0007QSZ1
LRALM0006QSZZ
XBPS730P05K00
RMOTP0027QSZZ
MSPRC0040QSZZ
CPLTM0084QS02
PGUMS0002QSPZ
XBPS740P16KS0
PGUMS0004QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
NBRGP0012QSZZ

23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

AZ
BG
AF
AD
AA
AZ
BB
BR
AA
AC
AB
AG
AG
AA
BG
AB
AK
AL
AB
AA
AA
AC

FQ
GT
DS
DJ
DD
FQ
GD
MJ
DD
DJ
DD
DS
DS
DD
GT
DJ
DX
EB
DD
DJ
DD
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

NPLYZ0004QSZZ

AG

DX

NPLYZ0031QSZZ
LX-BZ0049FCPZ
XPSSJ30-12000
NSFTZ0028QSZ1
LX-BZ0324FCPZ
NBLTT0002QSZZ

AL
AB
AB
AS
AA
AH

EB
DD
DD
EQ
DD
DX

C
C
C
C
C
B

30

NGERH0027QSZZ

AH

DX

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

LX-WZ0119FCP1
XRESP70-08000
NBRGP0011QSZZ
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
PGIDM0108QST1
XHBS730P08000
PGIDM0109QST1
LPLTM0497QSZZ

AC
AA
AC
AA
AG
AB
AG
AG

DD
DD
DJ
DD
DX
DD
DX
DS

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

39

LANGF0021QSZZ

AF

DS

Washer
E type ring(E7)
Winder bearing F
Screw(38)
Hinge guide L
Screw(38)
Hinge guide R
Panel support plate LN
Panel reinforce angle R

40

XHBS740P10000

AA

DD

Screw(410)

MB wire F
Optical base plate
Pulley
L pulley
E type ring(E4)
MB wire R
2/3 mirror unit
Copy lamp unit
Screw(46K)
Wire holder
Screw
MB-B rail R
MB-B rail F
Screw(35K)
Mirror motor
MB drive spring
Mirror motor fixing plate
Protection rubber
Screw(416KS)
Table glass cushion
E type ring(E5)
Winder bearing R
Winder drive shaft pulley
Winder pulley
Screw
Spring pin(3-12)
Winder drive shaft
Screw
Winder drive belt
Mirror motor idle gear

11

MB F

L
E
MB R
2/3
[Missing parts code]

MB-B R
MB-B F

MB

E
R

E
F

R
LN

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

6 1(Optical frame 1)
3
4

36

34
5
7
5
3 4

34

9
10

36

35
37
16
19

11

8
9

14
2

10

18
15

11

20
17

36
13

18

12

1
38

32

11

31

30 29

28
23
24

26

11
36

25
32

40

19

21
22

40

33

39

28
24

25

12

27

PRP03906

13
Update : 2009/11/16

7 2(Optical frame 2)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

19
20

PCOVP0075QSZZ
XNES730-24000
VHPGP2D03//-18
VHPGP2D07//-18
DHAI-0347QSPZ
DHAI-0346QSPZ
LHLDW1009ACZZ
XBBS830P08000
CPWBF0083QSE5
CDAIU0012QS15
PGUMS0004QSZZ
XHBS730P06000
VHPGP2D032/-18
RSNSZ0001QSPZ
XBPS730P08X00
LPLTP0230QSZZ
VHPGP1S73P+-18
MSPRD0232QSZZ
MLEVP0077QSZZ
LCRA-0002QSZZ
TLABH0461QSZZ
TLABH0267QSZZ
LHLDZ0104QSZZ
PSHEZ0218QSZZ

AE
AA
AZ
BA
AN
AP
AA
AA
AU
BG
AA
AC
BA
BA
AA
AF
AF
AB
AC
AC
AG
AD
AD
AC

DS
DD
FX
FX
EQ
EQ
DD
DD
EZ
GT
DJ
DD
FX
FX
DD
DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ

D
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
B
B
C
C
B
C
C
C
D
D
C
C

21

PSHEZ0217QSZZ

AC

DJ

22
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

PSHEZ0448QSZZ
PCASZ0010QSZZ
RCORF0002QSZZ
CLNS-0003RS55
LX-BZ0004QSPZ
DHAI-0345QSZZ
PSHEZ0108QSZZ
PSHEZ0219QSZZ
LX-BZ0031GCPZ
PSHEZ0254QSZZ

AA
AL
AE
BP
AB
AG
AC
AC
AB
AC

DJ
EB
DS
LE
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ

C
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C

38

PSHEZ0273QSZZ

AB

DJ

39
40
41

PGSK-0008QSPZ
XWHS740-08100
PMLT-0094QSZZ

AF
AA
AC

DS
DD
DJ

C
C
C

42

PSHEZ0443QSZZ

AC

DJ

43

PSHEZ0420QSZZ

AC

DJ

44

PTPE-0051QSZZ

AC

DJ

OP harness protect sheet


OP harness fixing tape

45

PSHEZ0426QSZZ

AB

DJ

OP harness protect sheet B

46

PTPE-0063QSZZ

AD

DJ

OP harness fixing tape A2

48
49
50

DHAI-0610QSP1
PTPE-0050QSZZ
PSHEZ0665QSZZ

BF
AA
AC

GN
DJ
DJ

C
C
C

Operation PWB FFC


Core fixing tape
Optical frame sheet

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Harness cover
Nut(M3)
Photo sensor(GP2D03)
Photo sensor(GP2D07)
Optical sensor harness
Optical sensor harness
Clamp(UAMS-05S-2)
Screw(38)
Sensor PWB
Optical base plate
Table glass cushion
Screw(36)
Photo sensor(GP2D032)
Photo sensor(GP2D071)
Screw(38X)
Open/close sensor fixing plate
Photo sensor(GP1S73P)
Return spring
Open/Close actuator
Mini clamp
Clean caution label
Clean caution label
CL lead holder
Edge protect sheet A
CCD harness protect sheet B

(Inch
(AB
(Inch
(AB

TR No.

Series)
Series)
Series)
Series)

(Inch Series)
(AB Series)

(U.S.A,Canada)
(Japan)

Optical bottom sheet And


Dark box
Core(HF57SH35*1)
Lens unit
Screw
CCD harness
Optical base plate bottom sheet A
Edge protect sheet B
Screw
Optical bottom sheet
CCD harness protect sheet A
Gasket
Washer
Cushion ORG
OP harness protect sheet F

13

(AB Series)
[Missing parts code]

(Japan)

CL
A
CCD
B
And

CCD
A
B

C
CCD
A

ORG
OP
F
OP
OP

OP
B
OP
A2
FFC

Effective
time

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

7 2(Optical frame 2)
10 AB

Series

11
4

Inch
Series

6
7

Inch
Series

10

15

12

11

12

43

20

3
9

34

41

31

32

21

19

5
9

39

17

39

45
10
24

10

3
9

48

13

2
AB
Series

16

14

18

50

33
40 9
33

26

29

30
49

22

42
46

22

22

38

22
48

14

28
44

PRP03907

15
Update : 2009/11/16

8 (Middle frame section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

1
2
5
6
7

DUNTK0616RSZZ
XEPS730P14X00
MARMP0025QSZZ
XEBS730P10000
CHAI-0356RS51

BV
AB
AD
AC
AL

NU
DD
DJ
DD
EB

E
C
C
C
C

CHAI-0603RS51

AN

EQ

9
10

LHLDZ0057QSZ1
DHAI-0506QSPZ

AH
AQ

DX
EQ

C
C

11

MSPRD0190QSZ2

AD

DJ

High voltage terminal holder B


LSU interface harness
High voltage terminal holder spring saw teeth L

12

MSPRD0191QSZ2

AD

DJ

High voltage terminal holder spring grid L

13

MSPRD0192QSZ2

AD

DJ

High voltage terminal holder spring case L

14

DHAI-0606QSPZ

BT

MW

AN2R ILSW interface harness

15

LX-BZ0020QSPZ

AB

DD

16

LPLTM0424QSZZ

AD

DJ

Step screw
CRUM connector fixing plate

18
19

XRESP50-06000
PCLC-0030QSZZ

AA
AQ

DD
EQ

C
B

20

DHAI-0590QSPZ

BT

NE

27
28
29

XBBS730P05000
LHLDZ0085QSZZ
LPLTM0248QSZ1
NROLR0089QSZ3
NROLR0135QSZ2
NBRGC0018QSZZ
PCOVP0062QSZZ
LSTPP0010QSZZ
MSPRC0220QSZZ
MLEVP0071QSZZ
CSW-M0007RS56
LHLDZ0065QSZ1
MSPRT0221QSZZ
JKNBZ0006QSZZ
XBPS730P08KS0
XBPSC30P06ES0
LFRM-0037QSZ6
XRESP60-08000
RMOTD0023QSZZ
MSPRC0024QSZ1
NCPL-0011QSZZ
RPLU-0024QSZZ
RPLU-0024QSPZ
MSPRC1318FCZ1
LPINS0025QSZZ
LPINS0026QSZZ
LPINS0028QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
XEBS730P06000
DHAI-0354QSPZ
DHAI-0605QSPZ
MSPRC0271QSZZ
XEPS723P12000
PSHEZ0394QSZ1
QSW-B0017QSZZ

AA
AE
AD
AY
AZ
AD
AD
AD
AB
AD
AP
AF
AB
AD
AB
AA
BA
AA
AZ
AC
AC
AM
AM
AA
AC
AC
AD
AA
AA
AG
BS
AC
AA
AB
AF

DD
DJ
DJ
FQ
FQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
GD
DD
FX
DJ
DJ
EG
EG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DS
MW
DJ
DD
DJ
DS

C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
B
C
C
D
C
C
D
C
B
C
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B

CPLTM0160RS59

BH

HC

CPLTM0160RS60

BH

HC

70

PSPAZ0041QSZZ

AA

DJ

74

PMLT-0120QSZ1

AL

EB

75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89

PMLT-0116QSZZ
PMLT-0117QSZZ
PCOVP0108QSZ1
XHBS730P08000
XHBS730P20000
NFANP0081FCZZ
LPLTM0392QSZZ
QCNCM1000FCPZ
LBNDJ0071FCZZ
PTPE-0062QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
XEPS730P14X00
PCOVP0109QSZZ
PMLT-0118QSZ1
PMLT-0148QSZZ

AE
AD
AK
AB
AB
BA
AK
AC
AC
AD
AA
AB
AN
AC
AB

DJ
DJ
DX
DD
DD
FX
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
EG
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
63
64
65
66

67

LSU unit(Include No.101)


Screw(314X)
Separator pawl arm
Screw(310)
MC harness
GRID-MCFB harness

E type ring(E5)
PS clutch
AN2R DV interface harness TW

[Missing parts code]

[Missing parts code]

Screw(35)
TR terminal holder
TR terminal plate
PS transport roller Ref
(Except Japan)
PS transport roller Ref
(Japan)
Bearing
ILSW cover
Right door stopper
Stopper spring
ILSW lever
Interlock switch
ILSW holder
ILSW spring
PS knob
Screw(38KS)
Screw(36ES)
Middle frame
E type ring(E6)
Toner motor
Hopper spring
Hopper coupling
Pawl solenoid
Pawl solenoid
Manual paper feed spring B
TN guide pin A
(Inch series,AB Series agency)
TN guide pin B (Except Inch series,AB Series agency)
TN guide pin C
(Japan)
Screw(410)
Screw(36)
TC harness
DHV harness
[Missing parts code]
Earth spring
Screw(312)
Solenoid sound proof sheet
Tray detect switch
Drive unit
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FG/M260FP,AR-5726]
Drive unit
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5731]
Solenoid spacer
Fusing cushion A
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FG/M310FP,AR-5731]
Fan cover cushion L
Fan cover cushion R
Fan cover
Screw
LSU cooling fan screw(320)
LSU cooling fan
Fan plate
Interface connector(BU03P-TR-PH)
Cable band(RSG-100)
Fan plate tape
Screw(412)
Screw(314X)
LSU cover
LSU cover cushion L
LSU cover cushion R

15

TR No.
LSU

MC
GRID-MCFB

B
LSU

L
AN2R ILSW

CRUM

E
PS
AN2R DV
TW

TR
TR
PS Ref
PS Ref

ILSW

ILSW

ILSW
ILSW
PS

B
TN A
TN B
TN C

TC
DHV

A
L
R

LSU
LSU

FAN

LSU
LSU L
LSU R

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

09/09

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

8 (Middle frame section)


Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART
change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE

NO.

DESCRIPTION

91

PCOVP0143QSZZ

AH

DX

Process air intake duct cover

92

PDUC-0010QSZZ

AH

DX

93

DHAI-0609QSPZ

AK

DX

Process air intake duct


AN2R PS fan harness

101

RMOTN0055QSPZ

BL

HG

Polygon motor(for LSU)

Effective
time

TR No.

AN2R PS

8 (Middle frame section)


89
86

88

83

87

86

85
82

79

82
80

81

76

79

75

80
MX-M310,MX-M310N
MX-M310FG/FP
AR-5731

84
2

101

91

78

84

2
10

78
77

47

20

48

49

16

92

52 53
70 5

11

42

20

53 15

93
53

13
63

50
51

19

12

18

65
53
28

37

67

66

74

35

44

31

55

29

54

28
31
27

36
6

64

39
41

40
43

44

56

32
6
30

34

16

29

54

33
14

PRP03908

17
Update : 2009/10/16

9 550 (550 cassette unit)


NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

LPLTP0159QSZZ
LHLDW1226FCZZ
LPLTM0179QSZ1
PSHEZ0274QSZZ
GCASP0006QSZZ
PGIDM0070QSZ1
PTPE-0021QSZ1
LPLTM0181QSZ1
PGIDM0071QSZZ
LX-BZ1144FCPZ
NGERH0193FCZZ

12

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

AD
AB
AR
AC
BA
AM
AA
AB
AL
AA
AB

DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
FX
EG
DJ
DJ
EB
DD
DD

C
C
C
C
D
D
C
C
D
C
C

MSPRC2631FCZZ

AC

DJ

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

MLEVP0755FCZ1
LX-BZ0833FCPZ
PSHEZ0244QSZ2
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0108QSZZ
MSPRC0354QSZZ
NSFTZ0047QSZ1
LPLTM0180QSZ1
NBRGP0041GCZZ
XEBS740P10000

AE
AC
AC
AA
AD
AC
AK
AE
AD
AA

DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
EB
DS
DJ
DD

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

23

GCOV-0282FCZZ

AH

DX

24
25
27
28
29

31

XBPS740P08KS0
PSHEZ5948FCZZ
LPLTM0277QSZZ
JHNDP0013QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
TCADZ0549QSZZ
TCADZ0550QSZZ
TCADZ0551QSZZ
TLABZ0335QSZZ

AB
AD
AC
AT
AC
AE
AE
AE
AD

DD
DJ
DJ
EZ
DD
DS
DS
DS
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D

501

CCASP0006RS79

BF

GN

Screw(48KS)
Cassette handle sheet P2
Side plate guide R
Cassette panel AN2R
Screw(38)
Size display card
[Missing parts code](Inch Series)
Size display label
(AB Series except Japan)
Size display label
(Japan)
Paper seal label
(Japan)
2nd 550 cassette unit[Missing parts code]

BH

GX

550 cassette unit(Without No.30)

30

Cassette rear edge plate


Turn fastener
Rotation plate
Rotation plate sheet
550 cassette
Guide F
GID tape
Side plate guide F
Guide R
Screw
UC manual paper feed gear
Fusing pressure spring

[Missing parts code]

Side plate F lever


Screw
Cassette sheet
E type ring(E7)
Lift gear(22T)
Lift gear spring
Lift shaft
Lift plate
Bearing
Screw(410)
Cassette handle cover P2

TR No.

550
F
GID
F
R

UC

P2

P2
R
AN2R

J
2nd 550

(Unit)
901

CCASP0006RS59

17

550
(No.30 )

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

9 550 (550 cassette unit)


2

501

8
6

7
9
10

4
11

11
13

12
22

7
27

14

31

22

15
17
18

22

22

23

21

19

30
20
29
25
28
PRP03909

18

24

16

19
Update : 2009/10/16

F (Paper feed section)


NO.

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

1
2
3

XEBS730P10000
CPWBF0081QSE2
MLEVP0064QSZZ

AC
AP
AD

DD
EQ
DJ

C
E
C

MLEVP0063QSZ1

AD

DJ

MLEVP0056QSZZ

AC

DJ

MSPRD0201QSZZ

AC

DJ

9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17

PCOVP0064QSZZ
RPLU-0026QSZ1
RPLU-0026QSP1
MARMP0026QSZZ
NROLR0133QSZZ
MARMP0019QSZZ
NGERH0990FCZZ
NROLR0132QSZ1
MARMP0021QSZZ
LPIN-0026MCZZ
NGERH0107QSZZ

AD
AR
AR
AD
AM
AD
AB
AR
AD
AA
AD

DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
EG
DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ

D
B
B
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C

18

MSPRD0389QSZZ

AC

DJ

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30

NBRGC0100FCZ1
NGERH0097QSZZ
DHAI-0350QSPZ
QSW-B0017QSZZ
NGERH0156QSZZ
MSPRC0209QSZ1
XRESP40-06000
XRESP50-06000
PCLC-0024QSZZ
NSFTZ0080QSZ1
VHPSG2481++-1

AC
AF
AG
AF
AD
AC
AA
AA
AX
AG
AE

DJ
DS
DX
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
FG
DS
DS

C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
B

31

DHAI-0399QSPZ

AF

DS

33
34
35

XEBS730P08000
LPLTP0192QSZZ
RHET-0006QSZZ

AC
AK
AQ

DD
DX
EQ

C
C
B

36

PSHEZ0391QSZ1

AC

DJ

Screw(38)
Dehumidify heater fixing plate
Dehumidify heater
Paper feed solenoid sound proof A

37

PSHEZ0392QSZ1

AB

DJ

Paper feed solenoid sound proof B

38

PSHEZ0393QSZ1

AA

DJ

Paper feed solenoid sound proof C

PARTS CODE

Screw(310)
Cassette sensor PWB
Paper detect actuator
Upper limit detect actuator
P-IN actuator
Paper feed in actuator spring
Solenoid cover
Paper feed solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Solenoid arm
Pick up roller
Pick up arm F
Gear(16T)
Paper feed roller AND2
Pick up arm R
Spring pin(2-8)
Paper feed gear(20T)
Pick up roller pressure spring
Bearing 6
2nd joint gear
Cassette sensor harness
Tray detect switch
Paper feed clutch gear(42T)
Solenoid spring
E type ring(E4)
E type ring(E5)
Paper feed clutch(42T)
Paper feed roller shaft
Photo sensor(SG2481)
Manual paper feed empty harness

19

TR No.

P-IN

AND2
R

6
2nd

E
E

(Japan)
(Japan)

Effective
time

09/09

Update : 2009/10/16

F (Paper feed section)


15

10

19
18

13
2

8
38

21

16

17

14
9

11
36
24

20

29

5
6

25

22
27 23

28

19

37
30

31

PRP03910

20

21
Update : 2009/11/16

G (Paper transfer section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2

XEBS740P12000
PCOVP0053QSZ6

AA
AK

DD
EB

C
D

MSPRD0194QSZ1

AD

DJ

4
5
6
7
8
9

MSPRC0291QSZZ
NSFTZ0065QSZ1
NKOM-0006QSZZ
PSHEZ0133QSZZ
XEBS740P10000
PGIDM0067QST1

AC
AD
AC
AD
AA
AP

DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ

C
C
C
C
C
C

10

MSPRD0233QSZ1

AC

DJ

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

MLEVP0023QSZZ
MLEVP0044QSZZ
LPLTP0348QSZZ
MSPRC0301QSZZ
PFTA-0019QSZZ
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0242QSZ1
LRALP0008QSZ2
VHPGP1S73P+-18
DHAI-0398QSPZ

AE
AE
AC
AD
AE
AC
AH
AN
AF
AE

DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DS
DD
DX
EG
DS
DS

C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
B
C

21

MSPRD0202QSZZ

AB

DJ

22

MLEVP0057QSZZ

AC

DJ

23
24
25

PSHEZ0515QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PCOVP0088QSZ1

AG
AC
AD

DX
DJ
DJ

A
C
D

26

MSPRC0270QSZZ

AB

DJ

27
28
29
33
34
36
37
38

NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
XBPS730P08KS0
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ
PSHEZ0463QSZZ
PSPO-0026QSZZ
LHLDZ0094QSZZ

AC
AF
AB
AC
AC
AD
AA
AC

DJ
DS
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

39

MSPRC0292QSZZ

AC

DJ

40

MSPRD0287QSZZ

AC

DJ

41
42

NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ

AD
AC

DJ
DJ

C
C

43

PSHEZ0314QSZ2

AF

DS

44

LBRC-0012QSZZ

AD

DJ

45
46

NKOM-0011QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ

AC
AC

DJ
DJ

C
C

47

MSPRD0340QSZZ

AC

DJ

48
51
52
53
54

XEBS730P08000
LPLTM0396QSZ1
LX-WZ0064FCZZ
PGIDM0186QSZZ
LPLTM6022FCZZ

AC
AD
AA
AK
AC

DD
DJ
DD
DX
DJ

C
C
C
D
C

501

CGIDM0067RS56

AX

FG

502

CCOVP0053RS55

AS

EZ

503
504

CCOVP0088RS56
CPLTP0409RS51

AN
AN

EQ
EG

E
E

DESCRIPTION

PS
LP
PS pressure spring
PS
PS sub shaft
PS
PS collar(13.5)
PS
Paper feed sheet

Screw(410)

Base plate paper feed guide

MF actuator spring
MF

MF actuator
MF
MF actuator 2
MF 2
Separator plate

Pressure plate spring

Pressure plate cover

Screw(310)

Pressure plate sheet

Base plate rail R


R
Photo sensor(GP1S73P)

Manual paper feed P-IN harness


P-IN
Manual paper feed P-IN actuator spring
P-IN

Manual paper feed P-IN actuator


P-IN

Separator sheet

Separator plate AND2


AND2
Plate cover

Separator plate spring

Cassette guide collar

Cassette collar shaft

Screw(38KS)

Rail R side sheet F


R F
Rail R side sheet R
R R
Front separator sheet

MF ACT cushion
MF ACT
PS pressure holder
PS
PS follower connect spring
PS

Paper feed sub roller spring

Paper feed sub roller

Paper feed sub roller shaft

Toner protect sheet N

N
Manual paper feed sub collar bracket

Manual paper feed sub collar

Paper feed sub roller shaft

Manual paper feed sub roller spring

SP
Screw(38)

Separator guide plate

Push nut(M3)

Cover guide

M4 plate N
M4 N
Base plate paper feed guide unit [Missing parts code]

Middle frame cover unit


[Missing parts code]

Plate cover unit


[Missing parts code]
Separation plate unit

TR No.

Effective
time

Screw(412)
Middle frame cover
PS earth spring LP

21

1st lot
1st lot
1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

G (Paper transfer section)


48

48 53
48

1
43
54

36

502

501

1
5

11

4
4 39

38

10
48 17
44
14

38

46
15

45

47

12
37

13
20
19

16

34
33

21
22
18

41
42
40

28
23

27
29

51 24

52

26
25

504
40

503

16
PRP03911

22

23
Update : 2009/11/16

H (Side door unit)


NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4

MLEVP0058QSTZ
GDOR-0002QSTD
XRESP40-06000
LBSHZ0303FCZZ

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

AD
AV
AA
AC

DJ
FG
DD
DJ

C
D
C
C

NGERH0074QSZZ

AD

DJ

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

LPINS0133FCZZ
PTME-0020QSZ1
MSPRD0222QSZZ
MARMP0043QSZZ
NSFTZ0055QSZ3
XRESP30-06000
NROLP0036QSZZ
XPSSJ20-07000

AA
AC
AC
AC
AH
AA
AP
AA

DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DX
DD
EQ
DD

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

14

MSPRT0279QSZ1

AC

DJ

15

17
18
19

NROLP1122FCZZ
LFRM-0040QSZ3
LFRM-0040QSZ4
MSPRC0349QSZZ
MSPRC0348QSZZ
LPLTM0102QSZZ

AF
AS
AS
AD
AD
AD

DS
EQ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ

C
D
D
C
C
C

20

LHLDZ0084QSZ1

AE

DS

21

XEBS730P06000

AA

DD

22

MSPRC0296QSZZ

AF

DS

Screw(36)
TR pressure spring R

23

MSPRC0295QSZZ

AF

DS

TR pressure spring F

24
25
27
28
29

XHBS730P10000
XHBS730P16000
XEBS730P10000
LPLTM0090QSZ1
LPLTM0091QSZ1

AD
AA
AC
AE
AE

DD
DD
DD
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C

30

MSPRD0205QSZZ

AE

DS

Screw(310)
Screw(316)
Screw(310)
Inner reinforce plate F
Inner reinforce plate R
TC ground spring

31
32

34
36
38
39
40

LRALP0004QSZ3
LPLTM0363QSZZ
CHLDZ0150RS52
CHLDZ0150RS51
PSHEZ0307QSZ1
PSHEZ0431QSZ1
LX-BZ0084QSPZ
NGERH0243QSZZ
XEBS730P08000

AH
AF
BE
BE
AB
AF
AB
AD
AC

DX
DS
GN
GN
DJ
DS
DD
DJ
DD

C
C
A
A
C
C
C
C
C

41

MSPRC0289QSZZ

AB

DJ

Right door rail


Rail reinforce plate
TC unit
TC unit
Right door sheet
Right door DUP sheet
Screw
TC gear(20T)
Screw(38)
TC roller spring R REF

42

MSPRC0280QSZZ

AC

DJ

TC roller spring F

43
44

LSUPP0003QSZ1
PCLR-0014QSZ1

AD
AD

DJ
DJ

C
C

46

PGIDH0093QSZ3

AN

EG

Right door roller rib


TC roller collar A2R
TR front paper guide

49

LHLDZ0150QSZ1

AK

DX

Transfer holder And2 Ref

50
51
52
54
55
56
57

59

LPLTM0365QSZZ
NROLR0159QSZ1
NBRGP0023QSZZ
LPLTM0245QSZ2
LX-BZ1181FCZZ
LPLTM0512QSZZ
LPLTM0247QSZZ
PMLT-0044QSZZ
PMLT-0044QSZZ
PSEL-0163QSZ1

AD
AY
AD
AG
AB
AG
AC
AA
AA
AH

DJ
FQ
DJ
DX
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DX

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

60

LHLDZ0151QSZZ

AF

DS

TR electrode plate
Transfer roller AN3
Roller bearing
TR reinforce plate
Screw(36K)
Separate discharge sheet
Separate electrode plate
TR cushion
TR cushion
Transfer cleaner pad
Separate holder And2 Ref

61

PRNGF0107FCZ1
(Unit)

AC

DJ

Star ring

CDOR-0002RS62

BF

GN

Side door unit(Without No.33)

CDOR-0002RS63

BF

GN

Side door unit(Without No.33)

16

33

58

901

Lock lever
Right door
E type ring(E4)
M bushing C
DUP roller drive gear
Pin(210)
Lock pawl
Lock pawl spring
Lock pawl arm
Lock pawl shaft
E type ring(E3)
DUP transport roller
Spring pin(2-7)
DUP follower spring
PS upper roller
Right door inner
Right door inner
High voltage spring B
High voltage spring A
DUP roller earth plate
TR terminal interface holder

23

[Missing parts code]


E
M C
DUP

E
DUP

DUP

PS
(Except Japan)
(Japan)
B
A
DUP
TR

TR
R
TR
F

F
R
TC

(Except Japan) TC
(Japan) TC

DUP

TC

R REF

TC A2R
TR

And2 Ref
TR
AN3

TR

[MX-M Series] TR
[MX-M Series] TR

And2 Ref

(Except Japan)
(No.33 )
(Japan)
(No.33 )

TR No.

Effective
time
1st lot

09/11 mid

Update : 2009/11/16

H (Side door unit)


2
1

12

3
4

27

43
15

4
13
3

15

25
38

16

14

23

14

30
28

27
5

38

25

11

40
24

36

24

31

34
34

11
9
8

10

22
36

19
24

17

34

34

29

20

31

32
40

42

24

52
51

32

21

61

18
52
39

21

44
55
21

44

54

61
61
58

41

61
61
A

61
60 61

56

21
A

57 58

55
46

21
50

24

49 59

33
PRP03912

25
Update : 2009/10/16

I (Multi manual paper feed tray unit)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

PGIDM0075QSTZ
PGIDM0076QSTZ
XEBS730P08000
LSOU-0024QSTE
PTME-0271FCZZ
MSPRC0250QSZZ
NGERR0140QSZZ
XEPS730P06X00
NGERP1385FCZZ
LHLDZ0066QSZZ
LSOU-0026QSTC
QSW-B0017QSZZ
DHAI-0359QSZZ

14

MSPRP2830FCZZ

AA

DJ

15

LPLTP0234QSZZ

AE

DS

16

MLEVP0035QSE2

AC

DJ

Width detect plate


Original detect actuator

17
18
19
20
22

CPWBF0106QSE4
LSOU-0025QSTC
VHPGP1S73P+-18
LSOU-0027QSTC
XEBS730P06000
(Unit)
CSOU-0024RS65
CSOU-0024RS66

AP
AS
AF
AP
AA

EQ
EQ
DS
EQ
DD

E
D
B
D
C

Manual paper feed VR PWB


Manual paper feed tray 1 lower
Photo sensor(GP1S73P)
Manual paper feed tray 2 lower
Screw(36)

BF
BF

GN
GN

E
E

Manual paper feed tray unit


Manual paper feed tray unit

901

AE
AE
AC
AS
AD
AC
AD
AA
AF
AD
AP
AF
AP

DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DS
DJ
EQ
DS
EQ

C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
B
C

MB side guide F
MB side guide R
Screw(38)
Manual paper feed tray 1 upper
Tray lock pawl
Tray lock spring
Width detect rack
Screw(36X)
Width detect pinion
Harness holder
Manual paper feed tray 2 upper
Tray detect switch
Manual paper feed unit harness
Width detect plate spring

25

[Missing parts code] MB F


[Missing parts code] MB R

VR
[Missing parts code] 1

[Missing parts code] 2

(Except Japan)
(Japan)

TR No.

Effective
time
1st lot
1st lot

1st lot
1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

I (Multi manual paper feed tray unit)


3

4
1

10

11
12
12

5
9

3
14

7
A

16
A

15
13
17

19

16
22

19

3
20

3
18

22
22

26

22

PRP03913

27
Update : 2009/10/16

J (Multi manual paper feed unit)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

PCOVP0107QSTF
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0099QSZZ
NROLR0922FCZ2
NGERH0223QSZZ
XPSSJ20-07000
NGERH0061QSZZ
MARMP0009QSZ1
MSPRT0351QSZZ
NROLR1267FCZ1
NSFTZ0096QSZ1
XRESP40-06000
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
LBOSZ0150QSZZ

AL
AC
AC
AR
AC
AA
AD
AF
AC
AH
AF
AA
AC
AE

EB
DD
DJ
ZZ
DJ
DD
DJ
DS
DJ
DX
DS
DD
DJ
DS

D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

15

MSPRC1315FCZ1

AD

DJ

Multi frame cover N1


Screw(310)
Protect sheet S
Manual paper feed roller
Gear(20T)
Spring pin(2-7)
Gear(24T)
Roller arm
Roller arm spring
Pick up roller
Roller shaft F N
E type ring(E4)
M bushing C
Cam boss A2 N
Manual paper feed clutch spring A

16

PPIPP0109FCZ1

AC

DJ

Manual paper feed clutch sleeve A pipe

17
18
19

LBOSZ0199QSZZ
MARMP0041QSZZ
MARMP0006QSZZ

AE
AE
AD

DS
DS
DJ

C
C
C

20

MSPRD0347QSZZ

AD

DJ

Cam boss A1
Cam transmission arm
Fulcrum arm
Stopper arm spring

21

MCAMP0003QSZZ

AD

DJ

22

MSPRC1316FCZ1

AE

DS

23
25
26

PPIPP0014QSZZ
NSFTZ0017QSP1
NGERH0972FCZZ

AC
AD
AB

DJ
DJ
DJ

C
C
C

27

CPLTM0345QS01

AG

DX

29
30
31

XEBS730P08000
PTME-0178FCZ1
MSPRC2175FCZZ

AC
AC
AA

DD
DJ
DJ

C
C
C

RPLU-0028QSZZ

AM

EG

Screw(38)
Manual paper feed pawl A
Pawl A spring
Multi field solenoid

AM

EG

Multi field solenoid

32
RPLU-0028QSPZ

Drive cam
Manual paper feed clutch spring B
Cam clutch sleeve
Manual paper feed cum shaft
Gear(27T)
Paper feed connect plate TLPD

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

MSPRC1318FCZ1
PTME-0179FCZZ
XBBS730P10000
MARMP0027QSZ1
LFRM-0048QSTH
MARMP0008QSZZ
LPLTP0056QSZ3
XEPS730P06X00
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0241QSZZ
LBNDJ0013FCZ1
NSFTZ0090QSZZ

AA
AC
AA
AE
AS
AH
AD
AA
AC
AB
AE
AG

DJ
DD
DD
DJ
EQ
DX
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DX

C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

45

MSPRD0302QSZZ

AC

DJ

Manual paper
Manual paper
Screw(310)
Manual paper
Multi frame
Stopper arm
Stopper plate
Screw(36X)
Screw(310)
Manual paper
Band
Roller shaft R
Manual paper

46

MSPRD0329QSZZ

AC

DJ

Revers ACT spring

47
48
49
50
51
52
53

NCPL-0012QSZZ
CPWBF0083QSE5
DHAI-0360QSPZ
MLEVP0104QSZZ
LBSHZ0006QSZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LX-WZ0011QSZZ
(Unit)

AD
AU
AE
AD
AC
AC
AB

DJ
EZ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD

C
E
C
C
C
C
C

Manual paper feed coupling


Sensor PWB
DUP 2 sensor harness
Revers lever
M bushing 2
Resin E type ring
Poly slider(5-12-0.5)

901

CFRM-0048RS55

BE

GN

feed spring B
feed pawl B
feed tray arm

feed protection sheet


N
feed coupling spring

Multi manual paper feed unit(Without No.36,40,41,43)

27

TR No.
N1

F N
E
M C
A2 N

A
A1

TLPD

A
A

B
B

R N

ACT

DUP2

M 2
E

(No.36,40,41,43
)

Effective
time

09/09

Update : 2009/10/16

J (Multi manual paper feed unit)


901
52
2

11

17

51
14 6
12

12
43

15
29 13

13
16

44

52

29
29

53
45
9
46

18

48

23

25

17

12

32

30

42
6

27
22

20

26
21

29
50

19

47

33

31

5
41

10

49

34

7
40
35
37
41
36
40

36

38
39
PRP03914

28

29
Update : 2009/11/16

K DV (DV unit)
NO.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
501
901

PARTS CODE
LHLDZ0142QSZZ
PFILD0313FCZZ
XEBS730P08000
PGIDM0158QSZZ
PSEL-0162QSZZ
LX-BZ1066FCZZ
PGIDM0159QSZZ
PMLT-0137QSZZ
PMLT-0142QSZZ
PSEL-0964FCZ1
PMLT-0141QSZZ
PMLT-0147QSZZ
LDAIU0033QSZZ
NROLP0150QSZZ
NROLP0149QSZZ
PMLT-0146QSZZ
XEBS730P06000
LHLDZ0132QSZ1
PBOX-0025QSZZ
DHAI-0566QSPZ
XRESP40-06000
NBRGY0769FCZ2
NPLYZ0041QSZZ
LPLTM0194QSZZ
XBPS730P06KS0
NPLYZ0040QSZZ
NBLTH0494FCZZ
PSHEZ0652QSZZ
XBBS730P04000
PSHEZ0651QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
XEBS730P10000
NBRGC0020QSZZ
NGERH1653FCZZ
LX-BZ1143FCPZ
LHLDZ0128QSZZ
MSPRD0395QSZZ
LHLDZ0129QSZZ
PCOVP0122QSZZ
NROLM0151QSZ2
PMLT-0002YSZ1
PSHEP0632QSZZ
LPLTM0002YSZ4
LPLTM0477QSZZ
XBPBZ30P03000
PCOVP0121QSZZ
PCOVP0121QSZ1
XBBBZ30P06000
RDTCM0021QSZZ
XUBUZ30P08000
CHLDZ0142RS51
(Unit)
DUNT-0777RSZZ

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

AD
AG
AC
AH
AE
AC
AM
AD
AC
AA
AC
AB
AC
AS
AS
AB
AA
AC
AM
AQ
AA
AQ
AC
AC
AB
AC
AD
AA
AA
AA
AA
AC
AH
AC
AD
AC
AC
AC
AF
BT
AC
AB
AR
AK
AB
AE
AE
AC
AY
AA
AN

DJ
DX
DD
DX
DJ
DD
EG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ
EG
EQ
DD
EB
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
NE
DJ
DJ
EQ
EB
DD
DJ
DJ
DD
FQ
DD
EG

C
A
C
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
A
C
A
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
E

Filter holder
TN filter
Screw(38)
Cartridge guide top
DV blade
Blue screw(36)
Cartridge guide bottom
Pipe cushion N
Pipe cover cushion N
Cover upper seal
DV guide cushion N
DV side cushion R
DV block R
MX roller L
MX roller R
DV side cushion F
Screw(36)
Scraper holder
DV BOX
Toner sensor harness
E ring(E4)
MG bearing
MX pulley
DV box fixing plate
Screw(36KS)
MG pulley
DV belt
DV side sheet F
Screw(34)
DV side sheet R
E ring(E5)
Screw(310)
DMX bearing(F6/14)
DMX gear(24T)
Screw
DV holder F
Bias spring
MG holder
DV cover F
MG roller
DV TH cushion
Doctor cover seal
Doctor reinforce plate
DV doctor
Screw(33)
Doctor cover
Doctor cover
Screw(36)
ATC sensor
Screw(38)
Filter holder unit

BN

HZ

DV unit

29

TR No.

TN

DV

[Missing parts code] N


N

DV N
DV R
DV R
MX L
MX R
DV F

DV

E
MG
MX

MG
DV
DV F

DV R
E

DMX
DMX

DV F

MG
DV F
[Missing parts code] MG
DVTH

DV

ATC

[Missing parts code]


DV

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

09/10 R/C

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

K DV (DV unit)

501

1
2
3

3
6

8
7
9
6

10

12

11

13

22

23

21
26

24
3
15
27

16
22

19

17

28
18

A
29

31
24

32
33

40

36

42

41

34

44

30
34

32

45

35
37

43

33
45

38

32

32

46
45
47

48

39

3
49

PRP03915
30

21 C

22

14

20

901

25

31
Update : 2009/11/16

L (Process unit)
NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13

XEBS730P08000
PCAPH0022QSZZ
NSRW-0002QSZZ
LPLTM0241QSZZ
MLEVP0065QSZZ
CFRM-0049RS76
NCPL-0003QSZ1
PSEL-0071QSZZ
PSEL-0070QSZZ
PSHT-0014QSZZ
PPIPP0017QSZZ

14

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AC
AC
AE
AF
AE
AZ
AC
AF
AF
AC
AE

DD
DJ
DS
DS
DS
FQ
DJ
DS
DS
DJ
DS

C
D
C
C
C
A
C
A
A
C
C

MSPRC0045QSZ1

AC

DJ

15

PSPAZ0696FCZZ

AC

DJ

16
17
18

NGERH0036QSZZ
PCOVP0132QSZZ
NGERH0039QSZZ
LFIX-0015QSZZ

AC
AF
AE
AE

DJ
DS
DS
DJ

C
D
C
C

LFIX-0014QSZZ

AE

DJ

NGERH0037QSZZ
NGERH0038QSZZ
NSFTZ0020QSZ1
NBRGP0299FCPZ
PMLT-0018QSZ1
PTME-0021QSZZ
LX-WZ0329FCPZ
LX-RZ0001QSZZ
MSPRT0214QSZZ
LX-BZ0064QSZZ
MSPRC0213QSZZ
CHLDZ0035RS58
CCLEZ0011QS32
UCLEZ0011QSZ1
XEBS730P10000
PSHEZ0329QSZZ
PTPE-0026QSZ1
LHLDZ0090QSZZ
LX-BZ0406FCPZ
PRNGF0106FCZ2
PRNGP0081FCZ1
PSHEZ0557QSZZ
XBBS730P06000
CPIPP0017RS51
CTME-0021RS51
(Unit)

AC
AC
AL
AD
AC
AK
AB
AB
AB
AA
AB
AW
BD
BR
AC
AC
AA
AC
AA
AC
AB
AC
AC
AN
AK

DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DX
DD
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
FG
GN
MJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EG
EB

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
C
C
E
A

BG

GT

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
46
501
502

DESCRIPTION

[Missing parts code]

R
F

Pipe cap spacer

Transport screw gear(30T)

Drum cover

Transport pipe gear(14T)

Drum fixing plate B


(Inch series,AB Series agency) B
Drum fixing plate A
(Except Inch series,AB Series agency) A
Idle gear(26T)

Transport pipe gear(15T)

Transport screw

DV bearing
DV
Transport screw cushion

Separator pawl

Washer

Star ring

Lever spring

Screw(38)

Separator pawl spring

MC holder unit
[Missing parts code] MC
Cleaning brade

Cleaning blade
[Missing parts code]
Screw(310)

Toner stir sheet

Screw tape

Star ring holder

Screw(34)

Star ring N2
N2
Resin E ring(E4)
E
DR brake sheet
DR
Screw(36)

Toner pipe unit


[Missing parts code]
Separator pawl unit

Screw(38)
Toner pipe cap
Transport pipe screw
Process reinforce plate
Separator pawl lever
Process frame unit
Screw coupling
Seal R
Seal F
Toner pipe shutter
Toner pipe
Toner pipe spring

Process unit(Without No.19,44)


901

CFRM-0049RS5N

TR No.

31

(No.19,44
)

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot
1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

L (Process unit)

29

29

32

31
29

6
28

7
5

46
36
36
38

12
3
15

501

36

13

36
38
37
38

14
33
17

16
39

30
37

30

26
27

26
27

502
25

23
22

35
44

25

35
34

11

18

21
19

38
10

37

502
33

901

37

20

24
PRP03916

32

33
Update : 2009/10/16

M 1(Fusing unit 1)
NO.

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

22
23

MARMP0048QSZ2
MLEVP0100QSZZ
MLEVP0101QSZZ
RTHM-0050FCZZ
DHAI-0367QSPZ
LHLDW0086QSZZ
RH-HX0001QSLB
LPLTM0338QSZ1
VHPGP1SQ73P-18
XEBS730P06000
XEBS730P06000
LSTPF0172FCZZ
RLMPU0040QSPZ
RLMPU0041QSPZ
RLMPU0039QSPZ
LHLDZ0139QSZZ
LFRM-0098QSZZ

24

MSPRC0323QSZZ

AC

DJ

25
27
28
29
30
31
32

LPLTM0337QSZ1
NROLM0129QSZZ
NGERH0171QSZZ
NBRGP0025QSZZ
LPLTM0343QSZZ
CPLTM0336QS02
MSPRT0257QSZ1

AC
BB
AR
AN
AB
AR
AC

DJ
FX
EQ
EQ
DJ
EQ
DJ

C
A
A
A
C
A
C

33

MSPRD0322QSZZ

AC

DJ

Fusing earth plate UF


Heat roller(TL)
Fusing gear(TL)(38T)
Upper HR bearing(TL)
Gear key plate(TL)
Fusing cleaner plate
Upper pawl spring
Fusing ACT return spring

34

MLEVP0099QSZ1

AF

DS

Fusing rear paper detect lever

35
36
37
38

PGIDM0113QSZZ
PTME-0282FCZ2
LX-WZ0006QSZZ
PTME-0024QSZ2

AT
AH
AC
AN

EZ
DX
DD
EQ

C
A
C
A

39

LX-BZ0086QSPZ

AD

DJ

Fusing rear upper guide


Upper separate pawl
Washer
Upper separate pawl
Fusing unit fixing screw

40

CPLTM0513QS01

AF

DS

Thermistor felt fixing plate

41

LX-BZ1195FCZZ

AC

DD

42

LSTYM0004QSZZ

AK

DX

Screw(M3)
Fusing upper frame stay And3

43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

LPLTM0510QSZZ
LX-BZ1181FCZZ
LPLTM0473QSZZ
LX-BZ1126FCPZ
XHPS730P04000
XWHS730-05080
LX-BZ0093QSZZ
PCOVP0148QSZZ
XBBS730P06000
(Unit)

AD
AB
AE
AB
AB
AA
AC
AK
AC

DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DD
DX
DD

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

Earth joint plate


Screw(36)
Fusing earth plate And3
Thermister screw
Screw(34)
Washer
Screw
Thermostat cover
Screw(34)

DUNTW0782RSZZ

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 18)

DUNTW0782RS12

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 18)

DUNTW0782RS11

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 18)

1
2
3
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
!
!
!

PARTS CODE

19

901

AF
AE
AE
AN
AE
AB
AT
AC
AF
AA
AA
AA
BA
BA
BA
AD
AV

DS
DS
DS
EG
DJ
DJ
EZ
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DD
FX
FX
FX
DJ
FG

C
C
C
B
C
C
B
C
B
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
D

Pressure release fulcrum arm


Pressure release lever F TL
Pressure release lever R TL
Thermostat TL
DUP sensor harness
Harness ring
Thermistor TL
Fusing earth plate UR
Photo sensor(GP1SQ73P)
Screw(36)
Screw(36)
Roller stopper
Heater lamp
Heater lamp
Heater lamp
Lamp fixing plate
Fusing upper frame(TL)
Fusing unit earth spring

33

TR No.

[Missing parts code]


F TL
R TL
TL
DUP

TL
UR

[To No,51] (36)

(120V)
(230V)
(100V)

UF

HR

ACT

PG

LPD

[Missing parts code]

And3

And3

[From No,15] (34)


(120V)
( 18 )
(230V)
( 18 )
(100V)
( 18 )

Effective
time
1st lot

09/07 mid

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

M 1(Fusing unit 1)

1
44
44
1

43

44

3
10
22

45
2
50

15

41
15
44

44

47

47 47
48
8

13

41
B

11

40
47

14

15
15

15

48

51
40

8
48

15

48

42

41
A
23

12
46

24
25

28
46

29

15
30

19

49

27
31

29

32

34

32
33

35
39

32
37

18
37
38
36
PRP03917

34

39

36

38

901

35
Update : 2009/11/16

N 2(Fusing unit 2)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

1
2

NBRGY0022QSZZ
NROLR0156QSZZ

AL
BF

EB
GN

A
A

MSPRC0324QSZZ

AC

DJ

LPLTM0341QSZ1

AC

DJ

LPLTM0531QSZZ

AC

DJ

8
9
11
12

14
15
16

PGIDH0140QSZZ
LPLTM0340QSZZ
MSPRD0328QSZ1
PTME-0041QSZZ
TCAUH0017QSZ1
TLABH0381QSZZ
XBPSN30P08KS0
MSPRD0327QSZ1
LFRM-0072QSZ5

AY
AC
AC
AG
AC
AE
AA
AC
AT

FQ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
EQ

A
C
C
A
D
D
C
C
D

17

MSPRD0326QSZZ

AC

DJ

Fusing front guide


Fusing earth plate(DF)
Lower pawl spring R(TL)
Lower separate pawl
High temperature caution label
High temperature caution label
Screw(38KS)
Lower pawl spring F(TL)
Fusing lower frame
Fusing rear lower guide spring

18
19
20
21

PGIDM0115QSZZ
TLABH0289QSZZ
MLEVF0111QSZZ
MLEVF0112QSZZ
TLABH0685QSZZ
TLABH0683QSZZ
VRH-ST2HB507K
XWHS740-08090
(Unit)

AS
AA
AD
AD
AD
AE
AD
AA

EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD

C
D
C
C
D
D
C
C

Fusing rear lower guide


Fusing green label
Pressure lever F(AND2)
Pressure lever R(AND2)
High temperature caution label
High temperature caution label
Resistor(500M)
Washer

DUNTW0782RSZZ

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 17)

DUNTW0782RS12

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 17)

DUNTW0782RS11

BW

RJ

Fusing unit(Include Block 17)

13

22
23
24

901

Fusing pressure bearing


Fusing roller
Fusing pressure spring(TL)
Fusing earth plate(DR)
High resistor eatrh plate And3

35

[Missing parts code]

(Except Japan)
(Japan)

[Missing parts code]

(Except Japan)
(Japan)
[Missing parts code]

TR No.
FU

And3

F
R

(500M)

(120V)
( 17 )
(230V)
( 17 )
(100V)
( 17 )

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

09/07 mid

Update : 2009/11/16

N 2(Fusing unit 2)
1
21

3
5

2
1
8
24

3
23

20

14 12

11

9
12 11
13
24
16
12

17

12
15

14
18

15
19

36

22

PRP03918

37
Update : 2009/11/16

O (Drive unit)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

XBPS740P08ES0
RMOTP0069QSPZ
CPLTM0160QS02
MSPRC0200QSZ1
NGERH0234QSZZ
NGERH0090QSZ1
NGERH0084QSZZ
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0192QSZZ

AB
BA
AU
AB
AF
AF
AK
AA
AD

DD
FX
FG
DJ
DS
DS
DX
DD
DJ

C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

NGERH0086QSZZ

AD

DJ

NGERH0190QSZZ

AC

DJ

NGERH0087QSZZ

AE

DJ

NGERH0189QSZZ

AD

DJ

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

NGERH0010QSZZ
NGERH0092QSZZ
NGERH0093QSZZ
XBPS730P06KS0
NGERH0095QSZZ
NGERH0191QSZZ
NGERH0186QSZZ
NGERH0096QSZZ
CPLTM0161QS02
MSPRC0262QSZ1
NCPL-0009QSZZ
NGERH0091QSZZ
CGERH0204RS51

AD
AD
AD
AB
AE
AC
AH
AE
AP
AC
AC
AE
AX

DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
DJ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
FQ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

25

DHAI-0602QSPZ

AE

DS

Screw(48ES)
Main motor
Main drive plate
Ratchet spring
Ratchet gear(49T)
Fusing drive gear(19T)
Gear(94/21T)
E type ring(E7)
Gear(46/19T)
Gear(39/21T)
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
Gear(39/19T)
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]
Gear(30/21T)
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
Gear(30/21T)
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]
Gear(28T)
Gear(30/16T)
Gear(28/16T)
Screw(36KS)
Gear
MG gear
N gear(58/21T)
Gear(37/25T)
Sub drive plate
MG spring
MG coupling
Coupling gear(34T)
Drum coup gear
AN2R main motor harness

26
27
28
29

LX-WZ0012QSZZ
XRESP50-06000
LX-WZ0476FCZZ
LX-WZ0407FCZZ
(Unit)

AB
AA
AC
AB

DD
DD
DD
DD

C
C
C
C

Poly slider AND2


E type ring(E5)
Poly slider
Poly slider

CPLTM0160RS59

BH

HC

CPLTM0160RS60

BH

HC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11

901

Drive unit
Drive unit

37

TR No.

MG
N

MG
MG

AN2R

AND2
E

[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726]
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731]

Effective
time

Update : 2009/11/16

O (Drive unit)
7

28

4
25
1

6
29
8
9

10

13

15
11
15
12

14

17

21

12

18

22
20
23

27

26

24

16
12

15

19

38

PRP03919

39
Update : 2009/10/16

P 1(1st delivery paper unit 1)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
3

NSFTZ0042QSZ1
NROLP0049QSZZ

AE
AC

NROLP0111QSZZ

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

PBRSR0019QSZZ
NROLR0114QSZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ
LPLTM0195QSZ2
NBRGM0501FCZZ
XRESP50-06000
LHLDZ0058QSZ3
LPLTP0185QSZ2

14

DESCRIPTION

DS
DJ

C
C

AD

DJ

AK
AR
AB
AC
AB
AA
AQ
AL

DX
EZ
DD
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
EB

B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

MSPRD0224QSZZ

AB

DJ

15

MLEVP0055QSZ1

AC

DJ

16

MSPRT0197QSZ1

AC

DJ

17
18

22
23
24
25

XEBS730P08000
CPWBF0222QSE3
CSFTZ0023QS04
CSFTZ0023QS01
XRESP40-06000
LFRM-0038QSZ5
NROLR0051QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ

AC
AK
AE
AH
AA
AZ
AL
AC

DD
EB
DS
DX
DD
FX
EB
DJ

C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C

26

PGIDM0165QSZ1

AR

EQ

Screw(38)
Sensor PWB
Shifter shaft
Shifter shaft
E type ring(E4)
Delivery frame
DUP delivery roller
M bushing C
Delivery upper paper guide

27
28
29
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

NROLP1122FCZZ
MSPRT0229GCAZ
XHBS740P10000
LX-BZ0780FCPZ
PSHEZ0650QSZZ
PSHEZ0649QSZZ
PSHEZ0655QSZZ
PFILZ0017QSZ1
LX-BZ0099QSZZ
LPLTM0509QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
(Unit)

AF
AC
AA
AC
AB
AA
AD
AP
AB
AC
AP

DS
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
EQ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
A
C
C
B

PS upper roller
FU spring R
Screw(410)
Screw
Delivery hole sheet B
Delivery hole sheet A
Delivery fan connector sheet
Ozone filter
Screw
OF fixing plate
Fan motor ANR2

CFRM-0038RS74

BP

LP

CFRM-0038RS75

BQ

LP

BQ

LP

21

901

CFRM-0038RS76

Delivery sub roller shaft


Delivery sub roller
Delivery sub roller(Large)
Discharger brush LP
Delivery roller C
Transport roller bearing
Delivery earth plate A
Bearing
E type ring(E5)
Delivery roller holder
Delivery change gate
Delivery actuator spring
Delivery actuator
Delivery sub spring

(North America)
(Except North America)

[Missing parts code]

[Missing parts code]

TR No.

()
LP
C

DUP
M C

PS
FU R

B
A

OF
ANR2

1st delivery unit(Without No.29,35 Include Block 21)


1st
(North America) (No.29,35
21
)
1st delivery unit(Without No.29,35 Include Block 21)
1st
(Japan) (No.29,35
21
)
1st delivery unit(Without No.29,35 Include Block 21)
1st
[Missing parts code](Except North America,Japan) (No.29,35
21
)

39

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

P 1(1st delivery paper unit 1)


6
1
3
3

13

3
11
10

36

12

9
11

8 16

10

37

14

16

15
23

17
18

29

38

39
17

42
41

26
36
22
21

37

40

24
39

17
25
22

17

35
28
PRP03920

17

40

28

27

27

42

41
40

41
Update : 2009/11/16

Q 2(1st delivery paper unit 2)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION
(Except North America)
(Except North America)
(Except North America)

(Except North America)

(Except North America)


(Except North America)
(Except North America)
(Except North America)
(Except North America) E
(Except North America) E

M C

240

DUP

B
B
C

DUP

DUP

[Missing parts code] (2.63)

(Except North America)


(Except North America)
[Missing parts code] DUP

1
2
3
4

XHBS730P08000
RMOTS0071QSPZ
CPLTM0184QS03
XEBS730P08000

AB
BD
AH
AC

DD
GJ
DX
DD

C
B
C
C

MSPRD0225QSZZ

AC

DJ

6
7
8
9
11
12
13

LSTPP0003QSZ1
NGERH0068QSZ1
NGERH0067QSZZ
VHPGP1A71L3-18
XRESP30-06000
XRESP40-06000
MSPRD0216QSZZ

AC
AD
AD
AG
AA
AA
AD

DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DJ

C
C
C
B
C
C
C

14

MSPRT0217QSZ1

AC

DJ

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

LBRC-0002QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ
NBRGC0019QSZZ
XPSSJ30-08000
NBLTT0024QSZZ
NGERH0080QSZZ
NGERH0082QSZZ

AC
AC
AB
AD
AA
AG
AE
AD

DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DS
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C

23

MSPRD0198QSZZ

AC

DJ

24
25

NGERH0113QSZZ
NGERH0114QSZZ

AC
AC

DJ
DJ

C
C

26

MSPRD0196QSZZ

AC

DJ

27
28

NGERH0155QSZZ
RPLU-0027QSZZ
RPLU-0027QSPZ

AD
AU
AU

DJ
EZ
EZ

C
B
B

29

CBRC-0004QS03

AF

DS

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
501

RMOTS0070QSPZ
XHBS730P08000
XBBS726P03000
XWHS730-05070
LHLDW1334FCZZ
PSHEZ0316QSZZ
PRDAZ0002QSZZ
PSHEZ0341QSZZ
CPLTM0184RS54

BD
AB
AA
AA
AA
AD
AD
AA
AX

GJ
DD
DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
FG

B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E

502

CBRC-0004RS54

BA

FX

DUP motor
Screw(38)
Screw(2.63)
Washer
Wire holder
Delivery motor sheet
Delivery motor radiation plate
Shifter stop mylar
Shifter unit
DUP motor fixing bracket unit

BP

LP

1st delivery unit(Include Block 20)

BQ

LP

Screw(38)
Shifter motor
Shifter drive plate
Screw(38)
Stopper return spring
Shifter stopper
Shifter gear(50T)
Shifter gear(24T)
Photo sensor(GP1A71L3)
E type ring(E3)
E type ring(E4)
Shifter earth spring
Gate return spring
Gate bracket
M bushing C
Transport roller bearing
Bearing(6)
Spring pin(3-8)
Drive belt 240
Delivery drive gear(25/31T)
DUP delivery gear(20/31T)
Delivery earth spring B
Idle gear B(29T)
Idle gear C(29T)
Delivery earth spring A
Gear(31/39T)
Change gate solenoid
Change gate solenoid
DUP motor fixing bracket

TR No.

Effective
time

09/09

1st lot
1st lot

1st lot

(Unit)
CFRM-0038RS74
901
CFRM-0038RS76

(North America) 1st


( 20 )
1st delivery unit(Include Block 20) [Missing parts code] 1st
(Except North America,Japan) ( 20 )

41

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

Q 2(1st delivery paper unit 2)

501

24
2
25
4

4
13
3
7

502

16
15

37 6
11

17

20
12
19

28

18

26

22
21

33

23

27
35 32

30

36
31

14

34

29
PRP03921

42

43
Update : 2009/11/16

R (PWB section)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

CPWBX0136QS3L

CB

TX

1
CPWBX0136QS3M

CB

TX

2
3
4
5

XBBS730P08000
PSPAB0039QSZZ
CPWBF0235QSE1
XBBS830P08000

AA
AG
BB
AA

DD
DJ
GD
DD

C
C
E
C

DHAI-0611QSPZ

AV

FG

LHLDZ0062QSZ2

AT

EZ

8
9

LX-BZ0090QSPZ
LHLDW0086QSZZ
CPWBX0233QS31
CPWBX0233QS32

AE
AB
CD
CD

DD
DJ
UD
UD

C
C
E
E

CPWBX0233QS33

CD

UD

CPWBX0233QS34

CD

UD

30

CPWBX0233QS35
CPWBX0233QS36
XBPS730P06KS0
LHLDZ0071QSZZ
CPWBN0137QSE1
XHBS730P08000
LX-BZ0082QSPZ
LHLDZ0070QSZ3
XHBS730P08000
XEBS740P10000
XBPS730P08KS0
PSHEZ0269QSZZ
DHAI-0345QSZZ
CPWBX0140QS3K
CPWBN0174QS31
RSPA00001QSPZ
XEPS730P06X00
LSUPP0001QSZZ
DHAI-0606QSPZ
CPWBX0202RS55
CPWBX0202RS54
PCAPH0018QSZZ

CC
CC
AB
AG
AZ
AB
AA
AW
AB
AA
AB
AC
AG
CM
BV
AH
AA
AC
BT
BZ
CA
AD

UB
UB
DD
DX
FX
DD
DD
FG
DD
DD
DD
DJ
DX
UW
MW
DX
DD
DJ
MW
TR
TR
DJ

E
E
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
B
C
C
C
E
E
D

31

PCAPH0019QSZZ

AE

DJ

32

PCAPH0017QSZZ

AC

DJ

33

CPWBN0135QS34

BS

MW

DHAI-0591QSP1

BE

GN

BE
AS
AN
AP
AQ

GN
EZ
EQ
EQ
EQ

C
C
C
C
C

BF

GN

10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

35

39

DHAI-0601QSP1
DHAI-0200QSZZ
DHAI-0347QSPZ
DHAI-0346QSPZ
DHAI-0506QSPZ

40

DHAI-0593QSPZ

41

DHAI-0350QSPZ

AG

DX

42
43
44
55
56
70

DHAI-0610QSP1
DHAI-0381QSPZ
DHAI-0594QSPZ
TLABH0533QSZZ
TLABH0534QSZZ
RDTCH0161FCP1

BF
AH
BG
AB
AB
AV

GN
DX
GT
DJ
DJ
FG

C
C
C
D
D
B

72

DHAI-0595QSPZ

AE

DS

73

LSUPM0002QSZZ
RCORF0046FCZZ
RCORF0046FCZZ
DHAI-0597QSP1
DHAI-0590QSPZ
VHI29L1607DQS
VHI29L1607EQS
VHI29L1607QQS
VHI29L1607PQS
VHI29L1607TQS
VHI29L1607UQS
VHI29L1608MQS
VHI29L12856QS
VHI29L12858QS
VHI29L12854QS

AE
AH
AH
BF
BT
BB
BB
BA
BA
BA
BA
BA
BH
BH
BH

DJ
DX
DX
GN
NE
GD
GD
FX
FX
FX
FX
FX
HC
HC
HC

C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

37
38

74
75
80

82

83

DESCRIPTION
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP/M260FG,
AR-5726] IMC
IMC PWB
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP/M310FG,
AR-5731] IMC
Screw(38)

Spacer

Option interface PWB

Screw(38)

AN2R MCU-OP interface harness [Missing parts code] AN2R MCU-OP

MCU PWB fixing plate


MCU

Hexagon screw
6
Harness ring LPD
LPD
MCU PWB
[MX-M260 North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M310 North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M260/M260N/M260FP
/M260FG Except North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[MX-M310/M310N/M310FP
/M310FG Except North America] MCU
MCU PWB
[AR-5726] MCU
MCU PWB
[AR-5731] MCU
Screw(36KS)

Mother board holder

Mother board

Screw(38)

Screw(38)

OP PWB holder
OP
Screw(38)

Screw(410)

Screw(38KS)

CCD harness sheet


CCD
CCD harness
CCD
FAX main PWB
(Japan) FAX
LIU PWB
(Japan) LIU
Speaker
(Japan)
Screw(36)
(Japan)
Spacer(WLS18-0)

ILSW interface harness 2


[Missing parts code] ILSW 2
PCL PWB
[MX-M260N/M310N] PCL
PCL PWB
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL
15P protect cap
15P
25P protect cap
(Except North America,Japan,Argentina) 25P
9P protect cap
9P
SPLC PWB
[Missing parts code]
[MX-M260/M310/M260FG/M310FG,AR-5726/5731] SPLC
1st delivery harness
[Missing parts code]
(North America) 1st
1st delivery harness
(Except North America) 1st
CL harness
CL
Optical sensor harness
(Inch Series)
Optical sensor harness
(AB Series)
LSU interface harness
LSU
Drive/Manual paper feed interface harness
/
[Missing parts code]
Cassette sensor PWB harness

Operation PWB FFC


FFC
Fusing interface harness

AN2R power supply harness


[Missing parts code] AN2R
USB label AND
USB AND
NIC label AND
[Except MX-M260FG/M310FG] NIC AND
Temperature humidity sensor

Temperature humidity sensor harness

Support post
[MX-M260N/M310N/M260FP/M310FP]
Core

Core

MCU-casette harness
[Missing parts code] MCU-
DV interface harness
[Missing parts code] DV
MCU ROM
[MX-M260 North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M310 North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM [MX-M260/M260N Except North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM [MX-M310/M310N Except North America] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M260FG/M260FP] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[MX-M310FG/M310FP] MCU ROM
MCU ROM
[AR-5726] MCU ROM
PCL PRGDIMM
[MX-M260N/M310N Philippines] PCL PRGDIMM
PCL PRGDIMM[MX-M260N/M310N Except Philippines] PCL PRGDIMM
PCL PRGDIMM
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL PRGDIMM

TR No.

Effective
time

IMC PWB

43

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot
1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot
1st lot
1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

R (PWB section)
Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART
change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE

NO.

VHI29L32077QS

AZ

FQ

84

VHI29L32079QS

AZ

FX

VHI29L64012QS

BD

GN

85
86
87

LBNDJ0013FCZ1
PSPAN0025QSZZ
LX-BZ0024QSZZ

AE
AE
AA

DJ
DS
DD

C
C
C

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

Effective
time

PCL BOTDIMMJ

[MX-M260N/M310N Philippines] PCL


BOTDIMMJ
PCL BOTDIMMJ
PCL
[MX-M260N/M310N Except Philippines] BOTDIMMJ
PCL BOTDIMMJ
[MX-M260FP/M310FP] PCL
BOTDIMMJ
Band

Spacer

Screw

R (PWB section)
30

3
87

14

2
86

4
42

22

3
43 37

87
87

23
27

35
28

74 75

19

2 14
13
14

2
15

11
73
29

12

73

11

14

2
10

41 72

11

83

82
40 70
2

17

17
16
17

11

14

38 14
20

24

85

19

27 19

32

19

31

18

44
26

55
56

MX-M260N
MX-M310N

14

25

84

39

33

29

80
19
19
MX-M260FP
MX-M310FP

MX-M260/M310
MX-M260FG/M310FG
AR-5726/5731

44

PRP03922

45
Update : 2009/11/16

S (Rear frame section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

XBPSN40P06K00

DHAI-0596QSPZ

3
4
5
6

TLABZ4868FCZ1
XHBS730P06000
LPLTM0162QSZ1
LPLTM0252QSZZ

DHAI-0593QSPZ

8
9
10
11
12
13
15

DHAI-0378QSPZ
XHBS730P08000
XEBS740P30000
PGIDM0184QSZ1
XEBS740P30000
CDAIU0024RS57
LPLTM0249QSZZ
QACCD7713QCPZ
QACCB7623QCPZ

!
!

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AA

DD

BT

MW

AB
AC
AC
AD

DJ
DD
DJ
DJ

D
C
C
C

BF

GN

AC
AB
AC
AH
AC
AZ
AC
AT

DJ
DD
DD
DX
DD
FQ
DJ
EZ

C
C
C
C
C
E
C
B

BB

GD

QACCVR621QCPZ

AQ

FQ

QACCZR626QCPZ
QACCZR941QCPZ
QACCB9521QCZZ
QACCJ6413QCPA
QACCLR624QCPZ
QACCR7621QCZZ
QPLGA4171CCPZ
QPLGA0001QCZZ
QPLGA0009QCPZ
PHOG-1023CCZZ

BB
BB
AW
AY
BA
AZ
AR
AN
AR
AB

GD
FX
FG
FQ
FX
FQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
DD

B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B

!
!
!
!
!
!

!
!
!
!

19

TCAUS0009QSZZ

AF

DS

20
21

QSW-C9295QCPZ
QSW-C9294QCZZ

AL
AF

EB
DS

B
B

22

DHAI-0589QSPZ

BS

MW

23

DHAI-0545QSPZ

AH

DX

27

RCILZ0016QSZZ
RDENC0052QSPZ
RDENC0053QSPZ
RDENC0051QSPZ
RDENU0058QSPZ
LHLDW1057FCZZ
DHAI-0588QSPZ
LFIX-0016FCZZ
XEBS740P30000
XEBS740P12000
XWHS740-08100
XWSS740-10000
LPLTM0349QSZZ
NFANP0020QSPZ
XBPS730P30KS0
XBPS730P08KS0
LPLTM0369QSZZ
XHBS740P10000
LSUPP0133FCPZ
RCORF0031QSPZ
LBNDJ0013FCZ1
LHLDW1154FCZZ
LBNDJ0037FCZ1
PTUBP0012QSZZ
RCORF0004QSZZ
LBSHC0008QSPZ
LPLTM0478QSZZ
XHSS730P06000
XEBS730P12000
XEBS730P10000

BE
BZ
BZ
BZ
BN
AB
BF
AD
AC
AA
AA
AA
AS
AP
AC
AB
AG
AA
AC
AK
AE
AC
AA
AC
AF
AC
AF
AB
AC
AC

GN
TF
TF
TF
LE
DD
GN
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DD
EQ
EQ
DD
DD
DS
DD
DJ
DX
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DS
DD
DD
DD

C
E
E
E
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
42
45
46
47
49
50
53
56
57
59
60
61
62
63
64

DESCRIPTION

[Missing parts code] AN2R HL

Earth label
(200V Series)
Screw(36)

Drive earth plate

Paper feed earth plate LP


LP
Drive/Manual paper feed interface harness
/
[Missing parts code]
Cassette earth harness

Screw(38)

Screw(430)

Harness guide

Screw(430)

1st lift up unit


1st
2nd earth plate
2nd
AC cord
(North America) AC
AC cord
(U.kingdom,UAE,Yemen,Oman,Qutar,
Kuwait,Bahrain) AC
AC cord
(Germany,Switzerland,Europe,East Europe,
Algeria,Iran,Egypt,Syria,Tunisa,Nigeria,
West Africa,Morocco,Jordan,Lebanon) AC
AC cord
(Philippines) AC
AC cord
(Thailand,Indonesia) AC
AC cord
(India,Special country,Malaysia,Singapore) AC
AC cord
(Japan) AC
AC cord
(Australia,New Zealand) AC
AC cord
(Argentina) AC
Plug
(India)
Plug
(Special country)
Plug
(Malaysia,Singapore)
Plug protector
(India,Malaysia,Singapore)
LAG Plug caution label
(Argentina) LAG

Power supply switch(AJ8W200BF)

Dehumidify heater switch


(Japan)
Dehumidify heater switch harness
(Japan)

Dehumidify heater separate harness


(Japan)

Reactle
(200V)
Low voltage power supply unit
(120V)
Low voltage power supply unit
(230V)
Low voltage power supply unit
(100V)
High voltage power supply unit

Wire saddle(LWS-3S)

AC switch harness
[Missing parts code] AC
AC cord fixing
(100V Series) AC
Screw(430)

Screw(412)

Washer

Washer

Power supply fixing plate

P/S fan motor


PS
Screw(330KS)

Screw(38KS)

Delivery support angle

Screw(410)

PWB supporter

Core

Band

Wire saddle(LWS5S2W)

Band
(200V Series)
Tube(F520)
(200V Series)
Core
(200V Series)
Edging(L=32)
(200V Series)
AC Inlet fixing plate
(200V Series) AC
Screw(36)
(200V Series)
Screw(312)

Screw(310)
(200V Series)
Screw(46K)
AN2R HL interface harness

45

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

S (Rear frame section)


45

50

46

49 North America
only
1

27

46
5

3
2

4
15

8
9

10

42
11

63

34

39
38

50 49

42

42

31

47

42 29

42

42
47
60

12
13

20
28

42
42

34
64

2
34

33

36

35

32

59

61

56

62
57

200V
SERIES

53
37

36 35

100V
SERIES

53

30

9
PRP03923

19

46

53
Update : 2009/11/16

W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3

MSPRC0378QSZ1
MLOKZ0001QSZZ
XEPS730P08X00

4
5

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AB
AC
AA

DJ
DJ
DD

C
C
C

PGIDM0068QSZ1

AP

EG

MARMP0015QSZZ

AD

DJ

NSFTZ0054QSZ1

AD

DJ

NROLP1060FCZZ

AF

DS

MSPRP0345QSZ1

AD

DJ

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

XEBS730P08000
GCOVA0026QSTC
XEBS730P10000
PCOVP0089QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PSHEZ0515QSZZ
NROLR0130QSZZ

AC
AP
AC
AD
AC
AG
AL

DD
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
EB

C
D
C
D
C
A
C

16

MSPRC0270QSZZ

AB

DJ

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

NBRGZ0503FCZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LRALP0009QSZ2
XBPS730P08KS0
NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
PGIDM0074QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ

AC
AC
AP
AB
AC
AF
AK
AA
AC
AC

DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DS
DX
DD
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

27

MSPRD0287QSZZ

AC

DJ

28
29
30
31
33

NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
PSHEZ0356QSZ1
PSHEZ0347QSZ1
LPLTM0396QSZ1

AD
AC
AE
AC
AD

DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C

34

PSPAZ0055QSZZ

AA

DJ

35
501

LX-WZ0064FCZZ
CCOVP0089RS55

AA
AP

DD
EQ

C
E

502

CGIDM0068RS55

AU

EZ

503

CPLTP0409RS51

AN

EG

DESCRIPTION
Lock spring
Paper guide lock
Screw(38X)
Transport paper guide
2nd door arm
Transport paper guide shaft

U-turn roller
Transport paper guide spring

Screw(38)
Right cover
Screw(310)
Plate cover
Separator plate AND2
Separator sheet
Transport roller
Separator plate spring
Bearing
Resin E type ring
Cassette rail R
Screw(38KS)
Cassette guide collar
Cassette collar shaft
2nd U-turn guide
Screw(412)
Rail R side sheet F
Rail R side sheet R
Paper feed sub roller spring
Paper feed sub roller
Paper feed sub roller shaft
Plate cover sheet
2nd rail R sheet
Separator guide plate
Plate cover spacer
Push nut(M3)
Plate cover unit
Transport paper guide unit

Separation plate unit

53

2nd

[Missing parts code]

AND2

E
R

2ndU

R F
R R

2nd R

[Missing parts code]


[Missing parts code]

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot
1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)


3
2

2
1
4
a
a
b

8
6

8
26

23
25

502
9

31
19

10

28
29
27

24
15

22
21

18
24

17

14

20

33 13

35

503
27
30

16

34
12

34

501

54

11

PRP03927

49
Update : 2009/10/16

U 2nd 550 (2nd 550 cassette unit)


NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

LPLTP0159QSZZ
LHLDW1226FCZZ
LPLTM0179QSZ1
PSHEZ0274QSZZ
GCASP0005QSZ4
PGIDM0070QSZ1
PTPE-0021QSZ1
LPLTM0181QSZ1
PGIDM0071QSZZ
LX-BZ1144FCPZ
NGERH0193FCZZ

12

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AD
AB
AR
AC
BA
AM
AA
AB
AL
AA
AB

DJ
DJ
EQ
DJ
GD
EG
DJ
DJ
EB
DD
DD

C
C
C
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C

MSPRC2631FCZZ

AC

DJ

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

MLEVP0755FCZ1
LX-BZ0833FCPZ
CSHEZ0244QS02
XRESP70-08000
NGERH0108QSZZ
MSPRC0354QSZZ
NSFTZ0047QSZ1
LPLTM0180QSZ1
NBRGP0041GCZZ
XEBS740P10000

AE
AC
AE
AA
AD
AC
AK
AE
AD
AA

DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DJ
EB
DS
DJ
DD

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

23

JHNDP0012QSZZ

AU

EZ

24

XBPS740P08KS0

AB

DD

25

GCOV-0282FCZZ

AH

DX

26
27
28

PSHEZ5948FCZZ
LPLTM0277QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
TCADZ0549QSZZ
TCADZ0550QSZZ
TCADZ0551QSZZ

AD
AC
AC
AE
AE
AE

DJ
DJ
DD
DS
DS
DS

C
C
C
D
C
C

BF

GN

BK

HC

29
501

CCASP0005RS79

DESCRIPTION
Cassette rear edge plate
Turn fastener
Rotation plate
Rotation plate sheet
550 cassette
Guide F
GID tape
Side plate guide F
Guide R
Screw
UC manual paper feed gear
Fusing pressure spring

[Missing parts code]

Side plate F lever


Screw
2nd cassette sheet ASSY
E type ring(E7)
Lift gear(22T)
Lift gear spring
Lift shaft
Lift plate
Bearing
Screw(410)
2nd cassette panel AN2R
Screw(48KS)
Cassette handle cover P2
Cassette handle sheet P2
Side plate guide R
Screw(38)
Size display card
[Missing parts code](Inch Series)
Size display label
(AB Series except Japan)
Size display label
(Japan)
2nd 550 cassette unit
[Missing parts code]

TR No.

550
F
GID
F
R

UC

2nd
E

2nd
AN2R

P2
P2
R

2nd 550

(Unit)
2nd 550 cassette unit(Without No.30)
901

CCASP0005RS59

49

2nd 550

(No.30 )

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

Update : 2009/10/16

U 2nd 550 (2nd 550 cassette unit)


2

501

8
6

7
9
10

4
11

11
13

12

14

22
22

27
5

15
17
18

22

23

22

21

19

29
20
28

26

PRP03925

25

50

24

16

51
Update : 2009/10/16

V 2nd (2nd paper feed section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

PCOVP0070QSZZ

AD

DJ

CPWBF0095QSE3

AP

EQ

Sensor cover
2nd cassette sensor PWB

MLEVP0063QSZ1

AD

DJ

Upper limit detect actuator

MLEVP0064QSZZ

AD

DJ

MLEVP0062QSZZ

AC

DJ

Paper detect actuator


P-IN detect actuator

10
11
13
14

PCOVP0064QSZZ
RPLU-0026QSZ1
RPLU-0026QSP1
MARMP0026QSZZ
MSPRC0209QSZ1
NSFTZ0102QSZZ
QSW-B0017QSZZ

AD
AR
AR
AD
AC
AH
AF

DJ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DX
DS

D
B
B
C
C
C
B

17

DHAI-0397QSPZ

AD

DJ

18

NBRGC0100FCZ1

AC

DJ

19

MSPRD0389QSZZ

AC

DJ

20
21
22
23
24
26
27

MARMP0021QSZZ
NGERH0107QSZZ
LPIN-0026MCZZ
NROLR0132QSZ1
MARMP0019QSZZ
NGERH0990FCZZ
NROLR0133QSZZ

AD
AD
AA
AR
AD
AB
AM

DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DJ
EG

C
C
C
C
C
C
A

29

DHAI-0394QSPZ

AD

DJ

30

MSPRD0204QSZZ

AC

DJ

31

DHAI-0473QSP1

AG

DX

Solenoid cover
Paper feed solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Solenoid arm
Solenoid spring
2nd paper feed roller shaft
Tray detect switch
Cassette detect interface harness
Bearing 6
Pick up roller pressure spring
Pick up arm R
Paper feed gear(20T)
Spring pin(2-8)
Paper feed roller AND2
Pick up arm F
Gear(16T)
Pick up roller
Door open/close detect harness
Paper feed in detect actuator spring

Cassette sensor PWB harness

51

TR No.

2nd

2nd

AND2
F

Effective
time

09/09

Update : 2009/10/16

V 2nd (2nd paper feed section)


8
14

2
17
10

28 2
4

13

5 11
31

30
6
19
27
14

18
20

26

21
22
23

29
24

52

PRP03926

53
Update : 2009/11/16

W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

1
2
3

MSPRC0378QSZ1
MLOKZ0001QSZZ
XEPS730P08X00

4
5

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AB
AC
AA

DJ
DJ
DD

C
C
C

PGIDM0068QSZ1

AP

EG

MARMP0015QSZZ

AD

DJ

NSFTZ0054QSZ1

AD

DJ

NROLP1060FCZZ

AF

DS

MSPRP0345QSZ1

AD

DJ

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

XEBS730P08000
GCOVA0026QSTC
XEBS730P10000
PCOVP0089QSZZ
LPLTP0409QSZZ
PSHEZ0515QSZZ
NROLR0130QSZZ

AC
AP
AC
AD
AC
AG
AL

DD
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DX
EB

C
D
C
D
C
A
C

16

MSPRC0270QSZZ

AB

DJ

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

NBRGZ0503FCZZ
LSTPP0011QSZZ
LRALP0009QSZ2
XBPS730P08KS0
NKOM-0005QSZZ
NSFTZ0048QSPZ
PGIDM0074QSZZ
XEBS740P12000
PSHEZ0301QSZZ
PSHEZ0302QSZZ

AC
AC
AP
AB
AC
AF
AK
AA
AC
AC

DJ
DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DS
DX
DD
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

27

MSPRD0287QSZZ

AC

DJ

28
29
30
31
33

NROLP0087QSZZ
NSFTZ0101QSZZ
PSHEZ0356QSZ1
PSHEZ0347QSZ1
LPLTM0396QSZ1

AD
AC
AE
AC
AD

DJ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C

34

PSPAZ0055QSZZ

AA

DJ

35
501

LX-WZ0064FCZZ
CCOVP0089RS55

AA
AP

DD
EQ

C
E

502

CGIDM0068RS55

AU

EZ

503

CPLTP0409RS51

AN

EG

DESCRIPTION
Lock spring
Paper guide lock
Screw(38X)
Transport paper guide
2nd door arm
Transport paper guide shaft

U-turn roller
Transport paper guide spring

Screw(38)
Right cover
Screw(310)
Plate cover
Separator plate AND2
Separator sheet
Transport roller
Separator plate spring
Bearing
Resin E type ring
Cassette rail R
Screw(38KS)
Cassette guide collar
Cassette collar shaft
2nd U-turn guide
Screw(412)
Rail R side sheet F
Rail R side sheet R
Paper feed sub roller spring
Paper feed sub roller
Paper feed sub roller shaft
Plate cover sheet
2nd rail R sheet
Separator guide plate
Plate cover spacer
Push nut(M3)
Plate cover unit
Transport paper guide unit

Separation plate unit

53

2nd

[Missing parts code]

AND2

E
R

2ndU

R F
R R

2nd R

[Missing parts code]


[Missing parts code]

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot
1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

W 2nd (2nd paper transfer section)


3
2

2
1
4
a
a
b

8
6

8
26

23
25

502
9

31
19

10

28
29
27

24
15

22
21

18
24

17

14

20

33 13

35

503
27
30

16

34
12

34

501

54

11

PRP03927

55
Update : 2009/10/16

X 2nd (2nd drive section)


NO.

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE

DESCRIPTION

PCOVP0084QSZZ

AE

DJ

CPWBF0228QSE1

AX

FG

3
4
5
6

XEBS730P08000
DHAI-0597QSP1
NBRGC0100FCZ1
MARMP0018QSZZ

AC
BF
AC
AD

DD
GN
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C

PCLC-0031QSZZ

AQ

EQ

Screw(38)
2nd multi step harness
Bearing 6
Body joint arm
2nd paper feed clutch(42T)

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
20
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

XRESP40-06000
XRESP50-06000
MSPRT0203QSZZ
NGERH0119QSZZ
NGERH1207FCZZ
CDAIU0024RS58
XEBS740P30000
XEBS740P12000
DHAI-0474QSP1
LPLTM0203QSZ1
NGERH0121QSZZ
NBLTT0029QSZZ
PCLC-0020QSZZ
NPLYZ0027QSZZ
PSHEZ0250QSZZ
NROLP0008QSZZ
PSHEZ0249QSZZ
NBRGC0529FCZZ
LPLTM0176QSZ1
PSHEZ0556QSZZ

AA
AA
AC
AD
AF
AZ
AC
AA
BS
AF
AE
AG
AX
AD
AB
AD
AB
AD
AH
AC

DD
DD
DJ
DJ
DS
FQ
DD
DD
MW
DS
DJ
DX
FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
EB
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

E type ring(E4)
E type ring(E5)
Joint spring
Gear(36T)
Joint gear(40T)
2nd lift up unit
Screw(430)
Screw(412)
LUM harness
Multi step drive plate
Gear(20T/45T/26P)
Vertical transport belt
Transport clutch
Vertical transport pulley
Flange sheet
Pulley
Flange sheet
Bearing
Clutch earth plate
Harness holder sheet

TR No.

2nd
2nd

[Missing parts code] 2nd


6

[Missing parts code] 2nd


(42T)
E
E

2nd

[Missing parts code] LUM

2nd bottom cover


2nd cassette interface PWB

Effective
time

1st lot

1st lot

1st lot

X 2nd (2nd drive section)

2
3

11
29
30

17

3
25
b

13

32
33

24

31
28

10
12

14
15

8
26

14

20

15

34 15

15

5
6

9
7

PRP03928

55

56
Update : 2009/10/16

Y (Lift up unit)
NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

MSPRD0251QSZZ

AD

DJ

2nd cassette earth spring

MSPRC0263QSZZ
(Unit)
CDAIU0024RS57
CDAIU0024RS58

AC

DJ

Lift up spring

1st

2nd

AZ
AZ

FQ
FQ

E
E

1st lift up unit


2nd lift up unit

1st
2nd

CMOTV0778FCE3

AU

EZ

Lift up motor unit

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

NGERH0158QSZ1
LDAIU0024QSZ2
NGERH0102QSZZ
NSFTZ0045QSZZ
NGERH0103QSZZ
NSFTZ0044QSZZ
NSFTZ0060QSZZ
NGERH0104QSZZ
NGERH0105QSZZ
PCOVP0061QSZ2

AE
AF
AD
AC
AE
AC
AC
AE
AD
AH

DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS

C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D

MSPRD0208QSZZ

AC

DJ

Gear(29T/11T)
Lift up base
Gear(53T/14T)
Shaft
Gear(54T/13T)
Shaft
Shaft
Gear(13T/42T)
Gear(19T)
Lift up cover
1st cassette earth spring

12
13
901

TR No.

Y (Lift up unit)
3

FOR 1st LIFT UP

FOR 2nd LIFT UP

1
13

12

2
5
7
8

4
6
9
11

10

56

PRP03929

12

Effective
time

57
Update : 2009/11/16

Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Exteriors 1)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

GCAB-0075QST1
XEBS740P12000
XHBS730P08000
LSTPP0016QSZZ
PCLC-0023QSZZ
NPLYZ0033QSZZ
CGIDM0106RS53
XHBS730P10000
GCAB-0074QST1
MHNG-0021QSZZ
MHNG-0022QSZZ
XWVS740-05000
NBRGC0018QSZZ
LSOU-0037QST1
PCUSS0022QSZ3
PSHEZ0413QSZZ
PSHEZ0077QSZ1
XEBS730P08000

19

LPLTP0321QSZZ

20

GCAB-0078QST1

AV

FG

21

LSOU-0039QSZ1

AN

EQ

22

MLEVP0098QSZZ

AC

DJ

23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
37

VHPGP1S73P+-18
CPWBF0160QSE1
NGERP0168QSZZ
NGERR0169QSZZ
MSPRC0250QSZZ
PTME-0271FCZZ
XEPS730P08X00
MSPRP0315QSZZ
LSOU-0038QST2
LSOU-0041QST1
LPLTP0319QSN1
LPLTP0320QSN1
DHAI-0468QSZZ
CCLEZ0020QS01

AF
AS
AD
AE
AC
AD
AA
AD
AW
AP
AG
AG
AH
AK

DS
EQ
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ
FG
EQ
DX
DX
DX
EB

B
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

501

CSOU-0037RS53

CD

UD

502

CSOU-0038RS53

CE

UH

AR
AA
AB
AC
AS
AD
BX
AD
AH
AX
AX
AA
AD
BD
AW
AD
AE
AC

EQ
DD
DD
DJ
EQ
DJ
TF
DD
DX
FG
FG
DD
DJ
GJ
EQ
DJ
DJ
DD

D
C
C
C
B
C
E
C
D
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

AE

DS

DESCRIPTION

SPF

[Missing parts code] RSPF

SPF L
SPF R

OC
OC R
OC F

Original tray lower cabinet TLPD

TLPD
Original tray S
S
Original detect actuator

Photo sensor(GP1S73P)

SPF VR PWB
SPF VR
Pinion gear(36T)

Width detect rack gear TLPD


TLPD
Tray lock spring

Tray lock pawl

Screw(38X)

Regulation plate spring

Original tray TLPD


TLPD
Middle tray TLPD
TLPD
Regulation plate F TLPD
F TLPD
Regulation plate R TLPD
R TLPD
Original tray harness

SPF glass cleaner


SFP
Base tray unit(Include Block 31-501)

( 31-501
)
Original tray unit

Rear cabinet
Screw(412)
Screw(38)
Stopper
SPF paper feed clutch
Coupling pulley(39P)
SPF Transport unit
Screw(310)
Front cabinet
SPF hinge L
SPF hinge R
Washer
Bearing
Base tray
OC mat
OC mat sheet R
OC mat sheet F
Screw(38)
Width detect sensor fixing plate

57

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

Z MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Exteriors 1)


2

1
3
8

5 4

13

7
2

33

32

34

501

10
22
23
22

35
9

35

12
11

23

31

12

12
2

26
29

21

30

25

12
37

27

28

26

29

19

24

16

18

14

17
20

18

18
18

502

15

18

58

PRP03930

59
Update : 2009/11/16

[ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Exteriors 2)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2
3
4
5
6

CPWBF0139QSE1
XHBS730P08000
DHAI-0448QSZZ
LPLTM0111QSZZ
RPLU-0011QSZ2
PSPO-0023QSZZ

PSPO-0004QSZZ

AB

DJ

RCORF0026FCZZ

AL

EB

BA
AB
AV
AC
BA
AB

FX
DD
FG
DJ
FX
DJ

E
C
C
C
B
C

MSPRD0342QSZZ

AD

DJ

10
11
12
13

MLEVP0036QSZZ
MLEVF0093QSZZ
XBBS730P05000
DHAI-0388QSPZ

AD
AE
AA
AE

DJ
DJ
DD
DS

C
C
C
C

14

MSPRD0211QSZZ

AC

DJ

15

VHPSG2481++-1

AE

DS

16

MLEVP0092QSZZ

AC

DJ

17
18

XRESP20-04000
NROLP0011QSZZ

AA
AD

DD
DJ

C
C

19

PSPO-0020QSZZ

AB

DJ

20

PSHEZ0285QSZZ

AB

DJ

21
22
23

NSFTZ0013QSP1
PSPO-0003QSZZ
LHLDZ0101QSZZ
LHLDZ0101QSZ1

AF
AC
AE
AE

DJ
DJ
DS
DJ

C
C
C
C

24

MSPRD0305QSZZ

AC

DJ

25
26
27
28
29
30

LPINS0327FCZZ
NSFTZ0072QSZ2
XRESP50-06000
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NSFTZ0009QSP1
NROLP1517FCZZ

AC
AN
AA
AB
AE
AA

DJ
EQ
DD
DJ
DJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
B

31

MSPRP0306QSZZ

AC

DJ

32
33

LPLTM0316QSZZ
XEBS730P08000

AH
AC

DX
DD

C
C

34

MSPRC0307QSZ1

AC

DJ

35

MSPRP0123QSZZ

AD

DJ

36

MSPRT0308QSZZ

AC

DJ

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

PSHEZ0436QSZZ
PSHEZ0069QSZZ
PSHEZ0439QSZ1
LPLTP0117QSZZ
NBRGP0041GCZZ
PRNGP0090FCZ1
LSOU-0037QST1
PSHEZ0459QSZZ

AD
AE
AD
AM
AD
AB
BD
AC

DJ
DJ
DJ
EG
DJ
DJ
GJ
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

501

CSOU-0037RS53

CD

UD

DESCRIPTION
SPF interface PWB
SPF
Screw(38)

SPF interface harness


SPF
Reinforce plate earth plate

Gate solenoid
[Missing parts code]
Sound proof sponge

Delivery gate sound proof sponge

Core(TRC-16813)

Delivery gate spring

Delivery gate lever

Pressure release lever

Screw(35)

Delivery sensor harness

Delivery sensor ACT spring

ACT
Photo sensor(SG2481)

Delivery sensor ACT lever TLPD

ACT TLPD
E type ring(E2)
E
Delivery follower roller

Delivery sponge LPD

LPD
Delivery follower sound proof sheet

Delivery sub shaft

Sound proof sponge

Pressure release holder

Pressure release holder

Delivery sub spring

SP pin(210)
SP
Pressure release shaft TLPD
[Missing parts code] TLPD
E type ring(E5)
E
Bearing

Transport sub shaft

Transport sub roller

Read front sub spring

Base tray reinforce plate

Screw(38)

Read front follower earth spring

Transport sub spring

Delivery sub earth spring

Read front sheet

Base tray sheet

Delivery gate sheet

Delivery gate

Bearing

Resin E ring(E5)
E
Base tray TLPD
TLPD
Delivery gate sheet lower

Base tray unit(Include Block 30-501)

( 30-501
)

59

TR No.

Effective
time

1st lot

09/12

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

[ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Exteriors 2)


2

2
5

4
1

12
6
12

43

11

9 10
41
42

13
14
15

29

16
40

18

20

44 39
17
38

501

18

19

27

31
34

26

24
29

22
20

30

28

19

21

37

17

33
30

25

32
36

23

24
28 27

PRP03931

60

30

35
33

33

33

61
Update : 2009/11/16

\ MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Paper feeding section)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2
3
4

GCAB-0076QST1
NGERH0166QSZZ
PCLC-0316FCP1
MLNKP0001QSZZ

AN
AC
AP
AD

EG
DJ
EQ
DJ

D
C
B
C

MSPRD0309QSZZ

AC

DJ

6
7
9
10
11
12
13

NGERH0167QSZZ
NBRGM0096FCZ1
XRESP50-06000
NSFTB0075QSZ1
XPSSP20-07000
LPLTM0318QSZZ
XEBS730P08000

AD
AC
AA
AF
AA
AC
AC

DJ
DJ
DD
EG
DD
DJ
DD

C
C
C
C
C
C
C

14

MSPRD0314QSZZ

15
17
18
19

NSFTZ0074QSZ2
NBRGC0018QSZZ
NPLYZ0033QSZZ
PCLC-0023QSZZ

20

AD

DJ

AM
AD
AD
AS

EB
DJ
DJ
EQ

C
C
C
B

MARMM0047QSZZ

AE

DJ

21
22

LSTPP0016QSZZ
DHAI-0390QSZZ

AC
AC

DJ
DJ

C
C

23

PGIDM0105QSZ1

AQ

EQ

24

GCAB-0077QST1

AP

EQ

26

MSPRP0311QSZZ

AC

DJ

27

PTME-0029QST1

AE

DJ

28

MSPRD0310QSZZ

AC

DJ

29
30

NROLP1517FCZZ
NSFTZ0009QSP1

AA
AE

DJ
DJ

B
C

31

MARMP0046QSZZ

AD

DJ

32

PCOVP0094QSZZ
PCOVP0094QSZ1

AD
AD

DJ
DJ

C
C

34

CSFTB0073QS01

AF

DS

35

37
38
39
40

MARMP0044QSZ1
LFRM-0069QSZ1
LFRM-0069QSZ2
NCPL-0049FCBZ
NPLYZ0035QSZZ
NROLR0166QSZZ
NROLR1542FCZZ

AF
AQ
AQ
AT
AD
AX
AH

DS
EQ
EQ
EZ
DJ
FG
DX

C
C
C
C
C
B
B

41

NPLYZ0034QSZZ

AD

DJ

42
43
44
45

NBLTT0033QSZZ
VHPGP1S73P+-18
DHAI-0469QSZZ
PSHEZ0444QSZZ

AF
AF
AG
AE

DS
DS
DX
DS

B
B
C
C

46

MLEVP0097QSZZ

AC

DJ

47
48
49

LSTPP0015QSZZ
MLEVP0096QSZZ
MARMP0045QSZZ

AC
AC
AC

DJ
DJ
DJ

C
C
C

50

MSPRD0313QSZZ

AC

DJ

51
52

PSHEZ0407QSZZ
VHPSG2481++-1

AB
AE

DJ
DS

C
B

53

LHLDZ0153QSZZ

AC

DJ

54

PMLT-0095QSZZ

AB

DJ

501

CCAB-0077RS53

BP

LP

36

DESCRIPTION

TLPD

Paper feed drive gear(32T)

Bearing

E type ring(E5)
E
Paper feed roller shaft
[Missing parts code]
Spring pin(2-7)

Paper feed earth plate

Screw(38)

JAM release spring R TLPD


JAM
R TLPD
Paper feed shaft
[Missing parts code]
Bearing(8)

Coupling pulley(39P)

SPF paper feed clutch


SPF
U-turn paper guide arm R
U

R
Resin E ring(E5)
E
U-turn earth harness
U
U-turn paper guide TLPD
U

TLPD
U-turn paper guide cabinet
U

PS sub tension spring


PS

U-turn paper guide lock pawl TLPD


U

TLPD
U-turn paper guide lock spring TLPD
U

TLPD
Transport sub roller

Transport sub shaft

U-turn paper guide arm F


U

F
Maintenance cover

Maintenance cover

Pick up roller shaft ASSY

Pick up arm

Paper feed frame TLPD


TLPD
Paper feed frame TLPD
TLPD
1way coupling
1way
Paper feed roller pulley(16P)

Paper feed roller


[Missing parts code]
Pick up roller

Pick up roller pulley(16P)

Drive belt

Photo sensor(GP1S73P)

Paper feed unit harness

Pick up sheet

Original detect actuator

Stopper

Stopper release lever

Stopper arm

JAM release spring F


JAM
F
PS guide sheet
PS
Photo sensor(SG2481)

SPF pick up sub holder


SPF

Pick up arm cushion

U-turn paper guide unit


U

TR No.

Effective
time

Open/close cabinet
Paper feed shaft gear(20T)
Torque limiter
Pick up link TLPD
Pick up arm spring

61

1st lot

1st lot

09/12

09/12

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

\ MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Paper feeding section)


1
2
3
4
11

9
7
21

10

54

19
18

49
7
48

47

20

13

17

14
15

49
48

13

46
47

13

52

12

51

13

13
23
22

51
13
29

24

13
44

26

13
31

36
45
50

44

34

26

13

13

29
27

43
35

28
32

13
40

13

30

42

41
37

53

13

38

501

39

PRP03932

62

63
Update : 2009/11/16

] MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Transport section 1)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2
4
5
6
7
9
11
12
13
14
15
16

PGIDM0107QSZ1
PSHEZ0452QSZZ
PSHEZ0423QSZZ
LPLTP0328QSZZ
MSPRC0321QSZ1
PSHEZ0451QSZZ
LPLTM0327QSZZ
XHBS730P08000
NROLR0096QSZZ
NROLR0131QSZZ
NROLR0095QSZZ
PSHEP0647QSZZ
LPLTM0325QSZZ

AQ
AF
AP
AC
AB
AC
AD
AB
AR
AP
AR
AD
AH

17

MSPRC0360QSZZ

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

DHAI-0467QSZZ
RDTCT0006QSPZ
PTME-0030QSZZ
MSPRC3356FCZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
XRESP50-06000
XPSSP20-09000
NPLYZ0019QSZZ
PSHEP3029FCZZ
LHLDZ0102QSZ1
XEBS730P08000
NKOM-0007QSZZ

30

MLEVP0095QSZZ

32
33

VHPSG2481++-1
XEBS740P14000

34

MSPRC0153QSZZ

35

XWVS740-05000

36
37
38
39
40
41
42

EQ
DS
EQ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
EQ
EQ
EQ
DJ
DX

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
C

AC

DJ

AP
AX
AC
AA
AB
AA
AA
AE
AA
AC
AC
AC

EQ
FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DJ

C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

AD

DJ

AE
AB

DS
DD

B
C

AB

DJ

AA

DD

LPLTP0434QSZZ

AC

DJ

JKNBZ0009QSZZ
NBLTT0036QSZZ
NBRGC0017QSZZ
MSPRD0316QSZZ
LPLTP0324QSZZ
NROLR0097QSZZ

AE
AF
AC
AC
AH
AR

DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DX
EQ

D
B
C
C
C
B

43

LPLTM0326QSZZ

AM

EG

44

PBRSS0008QSZ1

AH

DX

45

PGIDM0106QSZ1

AU

EZ

46

PSHEZ0454QSZZ

AB

DJ

47

PSHEZ0455QSZZ

AD

DJ

48

MSPRC0063QSZZ

AB

DJ

49

LX-WZ5002BCZZ

AA

DD

501

CGIDM0106RS53

BX

TF

DESCRIPTION

SPF

PS SPF

AN2R

R
RSPF harness
RSPF
Paper feed in detect sensor

Open/close lock pawl TLPD


TLPD
Lock spring

Bearing

E type ring(E5)
E
Spring pin(2-9)

PS pulley
PS
Flange sheet DUP2
DUP2
Tension holder F
F
Screw(38)

Tension roller

Book sensor actuator TLPD

TLPD
Photo sensor(SG2481)

Screw(414)

Book sensor spring

Washer

Book sensor fixing plate B1A

B1A
JAM release knob(24P)
JAM
Belt(B79MXL4.0)

Bearing

Tension spring F
F
Revers gate plate

Delivery paper roller

Paper feed paper guide reinforce plate

Discharge brush

Transport R paper guide


R

Paper feed paper guide cushion R

R
Paper feed paper guide sound proof cushion

Delivery paper guide spring

Poly slider(6.2-12-0.5)

SPF Transport unit


[Missing parts code] RSPF
(Include Block 34-501,Without No.18)
( 34-501

No.18 )

TR No.

Effective
time

Paper feed guide


Front separator sheet
Separator sheet
SPF separator plate
Pressure spring
Sound proof sheet
Sound proof plate
Screw(38)
Transport roller
PS roller SPF
Read front roller
White sheet AN2R
Transport plate
Delivery paper guide spring R

63

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

] MX-RP10 1(MX-RP10 Transport section 1)


4

5
46

47

44

42
43

45

21

28
11

21
47

20

28

18

22
41

48

23

36
35

37

12
40
24
38

28
24
25

17

34

32

26
30

19

22

23

33

18

13

39

27

23

49

22
14

23

29
28
16

15

PRP03933

501

64

65
Update : 2009/11/16

^ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Transport section 2)


NO.

PARTS CODE

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

RMOTS0043QSPZ
DHAI-0467QSZZ
PTPE-0018QSZZ
XEBS730P08000
RPLU-0015QSP1
PSPO-0022QSZZ
XRESP40-06000
PSHEZ0414QSZZ
NBLTT0034QSZZ
NGERH0170QSZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NGERH0116QSZ1
XEPS730P08X00
NGERH0117QSZZ
XPSSP20-09000
NPLYZ0019QSZZ
NBLTT0035QSZZ
PSHEP3029FCZZ
XRESP50-06000

BG
AP
AC
AC
AR
AB
AA
AB
AF
AD
AB
AD
AA
AK
AA
AE
AE
AA
AA

21

MSPRP0312QSZZ

22
23

XHBS730P08000
NBRGC0017QSZZ

24

NPLYZ0018QSZZ

25
26
27
28
29
31
32

PCLC-0032QSZZ
NKOM-0007QSZZ
MSPRT0317QSZZ
LHLDZ0103QSZZ
LPLTM0322QSZZ
LPLTM0323QSZ1
XBBS730P05000

34

MSPRC0418QSZZ

35
37

GT
EQ
DJ
DD
EQ
DJ
DD
DJ
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD
DX
DD
DJ
DS
DD
DD

B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
C
C

AD

DJ

AB
AC

DD
DJ

C
C

AE

DJ

AX
AC
AC
AC
AF
AG
AA

FG
DJ
DJ
DJ
DS
DX
DD

B
C
C
C
C
C
C

AC

DJ

XWHS760-08115

AA

DD

PTPE-0069QSZZ

AC

DJ

38

LX-WZ5002BCZZ

AA

DD

501

CGIDM0106RS53

BX

TF

DESCRIPTION
SPF TLPD
RSPF

PS

E
U

Screw(38)

Bearing

PS coupling pulley
PS

PS clutch SPF
PS SPF
Tension roller

Tension spring R
R
Tension holder R
R
Transport earth plate

Motor fixing plate

Screw(35)

PS Brake spring AN2R


PS
AN2R
Washer(M6)

SPF motor cooling sheet


SPF

Poly slider(6.2-12-0.5)

SPF Transport unit(Include Block 33-501)


RSPF
[Missing parts code] ( 33-501
)

TR No.

Effective
time

SPF motor TLPD


RSPF harness
Motor earth tape
Screw(38)
Pressure release solenoid
Sound proof sponge
E type ring(E4)
Flange sheet
Belt(48S2M244)
Gear(48T/43P)
Bearing
Gear(48T/25P)
Screw(38X)
Gear(48T)
Spring pin(2-9)
PS pulley
Belt(B86MXL4.0)
Flange sheet(DUP2)
E type ring(E5)
U-turn earth spring

65

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

^ MX-RP10 2(MX-RP10 Transport section 2)


2

4
4

3
31

37
8

9
10
11

32

32

20

12

19

14
18
17

13
15
4
4

21

16
25

22
12

38

34

19
35

23

20
12

24

20
26

28
14

29
27

PRP03934

66

501

67
Update : 2009/10/16

_ MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)


NO.

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE
XHBS740P10000

AA

DD

CPLTM0216QS01

AH

DX

Screw(410)
DID rail sub plate

AH

DX

DID rail sub plate

PBRSR0021QSZ1
PBRSR0020QSZ1
LFRM-0047QSZZ
LFRM-0058QSZ1
MSPRT0229GCAZ
NROLP1122FCZZ
NROLR0056QSZ1
DHAI-0592QSPZ
MSPRD0218QSZ1
VHPGP1SQ44S-18
VHPGP1SQ73P-18
QSW-B0017QSZZ
NBRGM0501FCZZ
NGERH0111QSZZ
NGERH0110QSZZ
NGERH0112QSZZ
NBRGY2122SCZZ

AG
AH
AG
AG
AC
AF
AN
AH
AE
AK
AF
AF
AB
AC
AE
AC
AB

DS
DX
DX
DX
DJ
DS
EQ
DX
DS
EB
DS
DS
DJ
DJ
DJ
DJ
DD

B
B
D
D
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
C

2
CPLTM0216QS02
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20

DESCRIPTION

21

PGIDM0164QSZZ

AQ

EQ

Discharger brush S
Discharger brush L
Delivery frame
Delivery frame R
FU spring R
PS upper roller
Delivery roller
2nd delivery harness
Delivery earth spring
Photo sensor(GP1SQ44S)
Photo sensor(GP1SQ73P)
Tray detect switch
Bearing
Drive gear A(25T)
Idle gear A(29T)
Drive gear B(25T)
Transport roller bearing
Delivery lower paper guide

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

NROLR0051QSZ1
LBSHZ0303FCZZ
XRESP40-06000
MLEVP0067QSZ2
XRESP50-06000
XHBS730P08000
XHBS740P10000
NSFTZ0117QSZZ
PCLR-0015QSZZ
NGERH0230QSZZ
XBPS740P08KS0
PSHEP0660QSZZ
(Unit)

AL
AC
AA
AD
AA
AB
AA
AE
AC
AC
AB
AB

EB
DJ
DD
DJ
DD
DD
DD
DS
DJ
DJ
DD
DJ

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

DUP delivery roller


M bushing C
E type ring(E4)
Delivery actuator
E type ring(E5)
Screw(38)
Screw(410)
Joint idle shaft
21 collar
Gear(21T)
Screw(48KS)
Harness protect sheet

901

CGIDM0164RS51

BC

GJ

2nd delivery unit(Without No.28)

Effective
time

TR No.

DID

DID

S
L

R
FU R
PS

2nd

A
A
B

DUP
M C
E

21

[Missing parts code]

09/08 Mid

1st lot

[Missing parts code] 2nd


(No.28 )

1st lot

_ MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 2nd delivery paper unit)


1

33

28

32

4
3

30

10

11

29
8

31

18

17

26

16

5
8
8

19

12

20

15

27
13
21
25
22

28
26 16
24
PRP03935

27

67

23

68
Update : 2009/10/16

. MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)


NO.

1
2
3
4

PARTS CODE
LSOU-0034QST3
GCOV-0042QST1
MLEVP0066QSZZ
XEBS730P08000

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

AY
AK
AD
AC

FQ
DX
DJ
DD

D
D
C
C

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

[Missing parts code] 2nd

2nd delivery tray


Rail dummy cover
Actuator
Screw(38)

Effective
time
1st lot

. MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Job-separater unit)

68

PRP03936

69
Update : 2009/11/16

a (Packing material & accessories)


NO.

PARTS CODE
TINSE2026QSZZ

AY

FQ

TINSE2078QSZZ

BD

GN

TINSE2090QSZZ

BG

GX

TINSG2088QSZZ

BD

GN

TINSJ2031QSZZ
TINSE2027QSZZ

AY
AK

FQ
DX

D
D

TINSE2083QSZZ

AY

FQ

AR

EQ

TINSG2089QSZZ

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

TINSJ2032QSZZ

AK

EB

TINSJ2033QSZZ

AN

EQ

TINSJ2034QSZZ
CDSKA0261QS31

AW
AH

FG
DX

D
D

CDSKA0264QS31

AL

EB

CDSKA0265QS31
CDSKA0266QS31
CDSKA0267QS31
CDSKA0268QS31

AL
AL
AL
AL

EB
EB
EB
EB

D
D
D
D

TCADZ0049QSZZ

AH

DX

TCADS1693FCZZ
TCADZ0098QSZZ

AA
AF

DS
DS

D
D

CCADZ1518FC01

AB

DJ

CCADZ1561FC01

AK

DX

TGANE1001QCZB
QCNWG0013QSZZ
TKEIA0001QSZZ
SPAKA0484QSZZ
LX-BZ0015QSPZ

AC
AF
AE
BE
AF

DJ
DS
DJ
GN
DS

D
C
D
D
C

TCADZ0010QSZZ

AC

DJ

10
11

LHLDW1226FCZZ
TCADZ1275FCZZ
SSAKA3001CCZZ
SSAKA5003CCZZ
SSAKA2343QCZZ
SPAKA0134RSZZ

AB
AB
AA
AA
AA
AL

DJ
DJ
DD
DD
DD
EB

C
D
D
D
D
D

LBNDC0075FCZZ

AB

DJ

UBNDA0001FCZZ

AA

DD

SPAKA3914FCZZ
TLABZ0106RSZZ

AC
AF

DJ
DS

D
D

7
8

12
13
14

15
17
19

DESCRIPTION
Operation manual
[MX-M260/M310 English(North America)]
Operation manual
[English(Except North America,U.Kingdom)]
Operation manual
[Missing parts code]
[MX-M Series English(U.kingdom)]
Operation manual
[Missing parts code]
[German(Germany,Switzerland)]
Operation manual
[Japanese]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide) [English]
Operation manual(Copy/PCL install guide)
[English MX-M260N/M310N]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide)
[Missing parts code]
[German(Germany,Switzerland)]
Operation manual(Copy/SPLC install guide)
[Japanese MX-M260FG/M310FG]
Operation manual(Copy/SPDL install guide)
[Japanese MX-M260FP/M310FP]
Operation manual(FAX)
[Japanese]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260 North America]
CD-ROM
[Missing parts code]
[MX-M Series(Except North America)]
CD-ROM(PDL DISK1)
[MX-M260N/M310N]
CD-ROM(PDL DISK2)
[MX-M260N/M310N]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260FG/M310FG]
CD-ROM
[MX-M260FP/M310FP]
Installation report card
(Germany,Switzerland,Europe,East Europe)
Installation report card
(Japan)
Warranty card SUK
(U.kingdom)
Maintenance card EX
[MX-M260/M260N/M310/M310N,AR-5726/5731]
Maintenance card J
[MX-M260FG/M260FP/M310FG/M310FP]
SCA warranty
(Australia,New Zealand)
Line cable
(Japan)
Counter contract card
(Japan)
Bottom packing case
(Japan)
2/3 fixing screw
Fixing screw caution card

TR No.

1st lot
1st lot

1st lot

CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM

SUK
EX

J
SCA

2/3

Turn fastener

Cassette rotation tag

Vinyl bag(140360) (North America,Japan,Argentina)


Vinyl bag(140260)
(Except North America,Japan)
Vinyl bag(260380)

OC protect sheet
OC
AC cord band
(Except North America,Japan,India,
Special country,Philippines,,Malaysia,Singapore) AC
AC cord band
(India,Special country,,Malaysia,
Singapore,Argentina) AC
DV sleeve
(Japan) DV
LAG 4 label
(Argentina) LAG4

69

Effective
time

1st lot

Update : 2009/11/16

a (Packing material & accessories)

Japan
Except Japan

17
MX-M260(North America)
MX-M310(North America)
MX-M260FG,MX-M310FG
MX-M260FP,MX-M310FP

8
13
9

MX-M260(Except North America)


MX-M310(Except North America)
MX-M260N,MX-M310N
AR-5726,AR-5731
15

10
11
12

14

PRP03937

70

70
Update : 2009/10/16

b MX-VR10 (MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories)


NO.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
901

PARTS CODE
GCOV-0075QSZ1
GCOV-0247FCZZ
PCUSS0032QSZZ
MHNG-0025QSTZ
XWVS740-05000
XEBS740P12000
MHNG-0026QSTZ
SSAKH3012KCZZ
(Unit)
CCOV-0075RS53

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

BB
AS
AW
BC
AA
AA
BC
AD

GD
EQ
FG
GD
DD
DD
GD
DJ

D
D
C
C
C
C
C
D

OC cover
OC stocker
OC mat
OC hinge R
Washer
Screw(412)
OC hinge L
Vinyl bag

OC
OC
OC
OC R

OC L

BK

HC

OC cover unit

OC

Effective
time

b MX-VR10 (MX-VR10 Packing material & accessories)

1
6

7
5
6

4
6

5
6

901
14

PRP03938

70

71
Update : 2009/10/16

c MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)


NO.

1
2
3
6
7
9
10
11
12
14
15
16

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE
SPAKA0088QSZZ
CFIX-0012RS54
SSAKZ0004QSZZ
SSAKH3012KCZZ
SPAKA0488QSZZ
SPAKA0487QSZZ
LSOU-0041QST1
SSAKA1341QCZZ
SPAK-545ECCZZ
SPAKA0622QSZZ
CCLEZ0020QS01
TLABS3760FCZZ

AE
AU
AA
AD
BK
BF
AP
AA
AA
AG
AK
AC

DS
EZ
DD
DJ
HG
GN
EQ
DD
DD
DX
EB
DJ

D
E
D
D
D
D
C
D
D
D
D
D

DESCRIPTION

TR No.

SPF

R
L

OC
SPF
CE

Protect packing sheet


SPF glass fixing plate unit
Vinyl bag(80450)
Vinyl bag
Add R
Add L
Middle tray
Vinyl bag(180380)
Vinyl bag
OC mat fixing add
SPF glass cleaner
CE label

c MX-RP10 (MX-RP10 Packing material & accessories)


11

10

2
1
3

12

7
14

PRP03939

71

Effective
time

72
Update : 2009/10/16

d MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)


NO.

1
2
3
4
7
9
10

Inter- PRICE RANK NEW PART


change Ex.
Ja. MARK RANK

PARTS CODE
XEBS740P10000
XHBS740P10000
SSAKA0006UCZZ
LHLDZ0149QSZZ
SSAK-4271CCZZ
SSAKA2540QCZZ
PSHEZ0665QSZZ

AA
AA
AA
AH
AD
AB
AC

DD
DD
DD
DX
DJ
DD
DJ

C
C
D
C
D
D
C

DESCRIPTION
Screw(410)
Screw(410)
Vinyl bag(5060)
2nd delivery holder
Vinyl bag(420690)
Vinyl bag(260560)
Optical frame sheet

TR No.

d MX-TR11 (MX-TR11 Packing material & accessories)


1
2
3

4
7

PRP03940

72

Effective
time

09/08 Mid

COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION


All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted.
In any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS PROMOTION CENTER
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 November Printed in Japan t